3 @setfilename ../../info/org
4 @settitle Org Mode Manual
7 @set DATE February 2008
11 * Org Mode: (org). Outline-based notes management and organizer
14 @c Version and Contact Info
15 @set MAINTAINERSITE @uref{http://orgmode.org,maintainers webpage}
16 @set AUTHOR Carsten Dominik
17 @set MAINTAINER Carsten Dominik
18 @set MAINTAINEREMAIL @email{carsten at orgmode dot org}
19 @set MAINTAINERCONTACT @uref{mailto:carsten at orgmode dot org,contact the maintainer}
25 @c Subheadings inside a table.
26 @macro tsubheading{text}
36 This manual is for Org-mode (version @value{VERSION}).
38 Copyright @copyright{} 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation
41 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
42 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.1 or
43 any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
44 Invariant Sections, with the Front-Cover texts being ``A GNU Manual,''
45 and with the Back-Cover Texts as in (a) below. A copy of the
46 license is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation
49 (a) The FSF's Back-Cover Text is: ``You have freedom to copy and modify
50 this GNU Manual, like GNU software. Copies published by the Free
51 Software Foundation raise funds for GNU development.''
56 @title Org Mode Manual
58 @subtitle Release @value{VERSION}
59 @author by Carsten Dominik
61 @c The following two commands start the copyright page.
63 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
67 @c Output the table of contents at the beginning.
71 @node Top, Introduction, (dir), (dir)
78 * Introduction:: Getting started
79 * Document structure:: A tree works like your brain
80 * Tables:: Pure magic for quick formatting
81 * Hyperlinks:: Notes in context
82 * TODO items:: Every tree branch can be a TODO item
83 * Tags:: Tagging headlines and matching sets of tags
84 * Properties and columns:: Storing information about an entry
85 * Dates and times:: Making items useful for planning
86 * Remember:: Quickly adding nodes to the outline tree
87 * Agenda views:: Collecting information into views
88 * Embedded LaTeX:: LaTeX fragments and formulas
89 * Exporting:: Sharing and publishing of notes
90 * Publishing:: Create a web site of linked Org-mode files
91 * Miscellaneous:: All the rest which did not fit elsewhere
92 * Extensions and Hacking:: It is possible to write add-on code
93 * History and Acknowledgments:: How Org-mode came into being
95 * Key Index:: Key bindings and where they are described
98 --- The Detailed Node Listing ---
102 * Summary:: Brief summary of what Org-mode does
103 * Installation:: How to install a downloaded version of Org-mode
104 * Activation:: How to activate Org-mode for certain buffers.
105 * Feedback:: Bug reports, ideas, patches etc.
106 * Conventions:: Type-setting conventions in the manual
110 * Outlines:: Org-mode is based on outline-mode
111 * Headlines:: How to typeset org-tree headlines
112 * Visibility cycling:: Show and hide, much simplified
113 * Motion:: Jumping to other headlines
114 * Structure editing:: Changing sequence and level of headlines
115 * Archiving:: Move done task trees to a different place
116 * Sparse trees:: Matches embedded in context
117 * Plain lists:: Additional structure within an entry
118 * Drawers:: Tucking stuff away
119 * orgstruct-mode:: Structure editing outside Org-mode
123 * ARCHIVE tag:: Marking a tree as inactive
124 * Moving subtrees:: Moving a tree to an archive file
128 * Built-in table editor:: Simple tables
129 * Narrow columns:: Stop wasting space in tables
130 * Column groups:: Grouping to trigger vertical lines
131 * orgtbl-mode:: The table editor as minor mode
132 * The spreadsheet:: The table editor has spreadsheet capabilities.
136 * References:: How to refer to another field or range
137 * Formula syntax for Calc:: Using Calc to compute stuff
138 * Formula syntax for Lisp:: Writing formulas in Emacs Lisp
139 * Field formulas:: Formulas valid for a single field
140 * Column formulas:: Formulas valid for an entire column
141 * Editing and debugging formulas:: Fixing formulas
142 * Updating the table:: Recomputing all dependent fields
143 * Advanced features:: Field names, parameters and automatic recalc
147 * Link format:: How links in Org-mode are formatted
148 * Internal links:: Links to other places in the current file
149 * External links:: URL-like links to the world
150 * Handling links:: Creating, inserting and following
151 * Using links outside Org-mode:: Linking from my C source code?
152 * Link abbreviations:: Shortcuts for writing complex links
153 * Search options:: Linking to a specific location
154 * Custom searches:: When the default search is not enough
158 * Radio targets:: Make targets trigger links in plain text.
162 * TODO basics:: Marking and displaying TODO entries
163 * TODO extensions:: Workflow and assignments
164 * Progress logging:: Dates and notes for progress
165 * Priorities:: Some things are more important than others
166 * Breaking down tasks:: Splitting a task into manageable pieces
167 * Checkboxes:: Tick-off lists
169 Extended use of TODO keywords
171 * Workflow states:: From TODO to DONE in steps
172 * TODO types:: I do this, Fred does the rest
173 * Multiple sets in one file:: Mixing it all, and still finding your way
174 * Fast access to TODO states:: Single letter selection of a state
175 * Per-file keywords:: Different files, different requirements
176 * Faces for TODO keywords:: Highlighting states
180 * Closing items:: When was this entry marked DONE?
181 * Tracking TODO state changes:: When did the status change?
185 * Tag inheritance:: Tags use the tree structure of the outline
186 * Setting tags:: How to assign tags to a headline
187 * Tag searches:: Searching for combinations of tags
189 Properties and Columns
191 * Property syntax:: How properties are spelled out
192 * Special properties:: Access to other Org-mode features
193 * Property searches:: Matching property values
194 * Property inheritance:: Passing values down the tree
195 * Column view:: Tabular viewing and editing
196 * Property API:: Properties for Lisp programmers
200 * Defining columns:: The COLUMNS format property
201 * Using column view:: How to create and use column view
202 * Capturing Column View:: A dynamic block for column view
206 * Scope of column definitions:: Where defined, where valid?
207 * Column attributes:: Appearance and content of a column
211 * Time stamps:: Assigning a time to a tree entry
212 * Creating timestamps:: Commands which insert timestamps
213 * Deadlines and scheduling:: Planning your work
214 * Clocking work time::
218 * The date/time prompt:: How org-mode helps you entering date and time
219 * Custom time format:: Making dates look differently
221 Deadlines and Scheduling
223 * Inserting deadline/schedule:: Planning items
224 * Repeated tasks:: Items that show up again and again
228 * Setting up remember:: Some code for .emacs to get things going
229 * Remember templates:: Define the outline of different note types
230 * Storing notes:: Directly get the note to where it belongs
231 * Refiling notes:: Moving a note or task to a project
235 * Agenda files:: Files being searched for agenda information
236 * Agenda dispatcher:: Keyboard access to agenda views
237 * Built-in agenda views:: What is available out of the box?
238 * Presentation and sorting:: How agenda items are prepared for display
239 * Agenda commands:: Remote editing of org trees
240 * Custom agenda views:: Defining special searches and views
242 The built-in agenda views
244 * Weekly/Daily agenda:: The calendar page with current tasks
245 * Global TODO list:: All unfinished action items
246 * Matching tags and properties:: Structured information with fine-tuned search
247 * Timeline:: Time-sorted view for single file
248 * Stuck projects:: Find projects you need to review
250 Presentation and sorting
252 * Categories:: Not all tasks are equal
253 * Time-of-day specifications:: How the agenda knows the time
254 * Sorting of agenda items:: The order of things
258 * Storing searches:: Type once, use often
259 * Block agenda:: All the stuff you need in a single buffer
260 * Setting Options:: Changing the rules
261 * Exporting Agenda Views:: Writing agendas to files.
262 * Extracting Agenda Information for other programs::
266 * Math symbols:: TeX macros for symbols and Greek letters
267 * Subscripts and Superscripts:: Simple syntax for raising/lowering text
268 * LaTeX fragments:: Complex formulas made easy
269 * Processing LaTeX fragments:: Previewing LaTeX processing
270 * CDLaTeX mode:: Speed up entering of formulas
274 * ASCII export:: Exporting to plain ASCII
275 * HTML export:: Exporting to HTML
276 * LaTeX export:: Exporting to LaTeX
277 * XOXO export:: Exporting to XOXO
278 * iCalendar export:: Exporting in iCalendar format
279 * Text interpretation:: How the exporter looks at the file
283 * HTML Export commands:: How to invoke LaTeX export
284 * Quoting HTML tags:: Using direct HTML in Org-mode
285 * Links:: Transformation of links for HTML
286 * Images:: How to include images
287 * CSS support:: Changing the appearence of the output
291 * LaTeX export commands:: How to invoke LaTeX export
292 * Quoting LaTeX code:: Incorporating literal LaTeX code
293 * Sectioning structure::
295 Text interpretation by the exporter
297 * Comment lines:: Some lines will not be exported
298 * Initial text:: Text before the first headline
299 * Footnotes:: Numbers like [1]
300 * Quoted examples:: Inserting quoted chnuks of text
301 * Enhancing text:: Subscripts, symbols and more
302 * Export options:: How to influence the export settings
306 * Configuration:: Defining projects
307 * Sample configuration:: Example projects
308 * Triggering publication:: Publication commands
312 * Project alist:: The central configuration variable
313 * Sources and destinations:: From here to there
314 * Selecting files:: What files are part of the project?
315 * Publishing action:: Setting the function doing the publishing
316 * Publishing options:: Tweaking HTML export
317 * Publishing links:: Which links keep working after publishing?
318 * Project page index:: Publishing a list of project files
322 * Simple example:: One-component publishing
323 * Complex example:: A multi-component publishing example
327 * Completion:: M-TAB knows what you need
328 * Customization:: Adapting Org-mode to your taste
329 * In-buffer settings:: Overview of the #+KEYWORDS
330 * The very busy C-c C-c key:: When in doubt, press C-c C-c
331 * Clean view:: Getting rid of leading stars in the outline
332 * TTY keys:: Using Org-mode on a tty
333 * Interaction:: Other Emacs packages
334 * Bugs:: Things which do not work perfectly
336 Interaction with other packages
338 * Cooperation:: Packages Org-mode cooperates with
339 * Conflicts:: Packages that lead to conflicts
341 Extensions, Hooks and Hacking
343 * Extensions:: Existing 3rd-part extensions
344 * Adding hyperlink types:: New custom link types
345 * Tables in arbitrary syntax:: Orgtbl for LaTeX and other programs
346 * Dynamic blocks:: Automatically filled blocks
347 * Special agenda views:: Customized views
348 * Using the property API:: Writing programs that use entry properties
350 Tables and Lists in arbitrary syntax
352 * Radio tables:: Sending and receiving
353 * A LaTeX example:: Step by step, almost a tutorial
354 * Translator functions:: Copy and modify
355 * Radio lists:: Doing the same for lists.
360 @node Introduction, Document structure, Top, Top
361 @chapter Introduction
365 * Summary:: Brief summary of what Org-mode does
366 * Installation:: How to install a downloaded version of Org-mode
367 * Activation:: How to activate Org-mode for certain buffers.
368 * Feedback:: Bug reports, ideas, patches etc.
369 * Conventions:: Type-setting conventions in the manual
372 @node Summary, Installation, Introduction, Introduction
376 Org-mode is a mode for keeping notes, maintaining TODO lists, and doing
377 project planning with a fast and effective plain-text system.
379 Org-mode develops organizational tasks around NOTES files that contain
380 lists or information about projects as plain text. Org-mode is
381 implemented on top of outline-mode, which makes it possible to keep the
382 content of large files well structured. Visibility cycling and
383 structure editing help to work with the tree. Tables are easily created
384 with a built-in table editor. Org-mode supports TODO items, deadlines,
385 time stamps, and scheduling. It dynamically compiles entries into an
386 agenda that utilizes and smoothly integrates much of the Emacs calendar
387 and diary. Plain text URL-like links connect to websites, emails,
388 Usenet messages, BBDB entries, and any files related to the projects.
389 For printing and sharing of notes, an Org-mode file can be exported as a
390 structured ASCII file, as HTML, or (TODO and agenda items only) as an
391 iCalendar file. It can also serve as a publishing tool for a set of
394 An important design aspect that distinguishes Org-mode from for example
395 Planner/Muse is that it encourages to store every piece of information
396 only once. In Planner, you have project pages, day pages and possibly
397 other files, duplicating some information such as tasks. In Org-mode,
398 you only have notes files. In your notes you mark entries as tasks,
399 label them with tags and timestamps. All necessary lists like a
400 schedule for the day, the agenda for a meeting, tasks lists selected by
401 tags etc are created dynamically when you need them.
403 Org-mode keeps simple things simple. When first fired up, it should
404 feel like a straightforward, easy to use outliner. Complexity is not
405 imposed, but a large amount of functionality is available when you need
406 it. Org-mode is a toolbox and can be used in different ways, for
410 @r{@bullet{} outline extension with visibility cycling and structure editing}
411 @r{@bullet{} ASCII system and table editor for taking structured notes}
412 @r{@bullet{} ASCII table editor with spreadsheet-like capabilities}
413 @r{@bullet{} TODO list editor}
414 @r{@bullet{} full agenda and planner with deadlines and work scheduling}
415 @r{@bullet{} environment to implement David Allen's GTD system}
416 @r{@bullet{} a basic database application}
417 @r{@bullet{} simple hypertext system, with HTML and LaTeX export}
418 @r{@bullet{} publishing tool to create a set of interlinked webpages}
421 Org-mode's automatic, context sensitive table editor with spreadsheet
422 capabilities can be integrated into any major mode by activating the
423 minor Orgtbl-mode. Using a translation step, it can be used to maintain
424 tables in arbitrary file types, for example in La@TeX{}. The structure
425 editing and list creation capabilities can be used outside Org-mode with
426 the minor Orgstruct-mode.
429 There is a website for Org-mode which provides links to the newest
430 version of Org-mode, as well as additional information, frequently asked
431 questions (FAQ), links to tutorials etc. This page is located at
432 @uref{http://orgmode.org}.
437 @node Installation, Activation, Summary, Introduction
438 @section Installation
442 @b{Important:} @i{If Org-mode is part of the Emacs distribution or an
443 XEmacs package, please skip this section and go directly to
446 If you have downloaded Org-mode from the Web, you must take the
447 following steps to install it: Go into the Org-mode distribution
448 directory and edit the top section of the file @file{Makefile}. You
449 must set the name of the Emacs binary (likely either @file{emacs} or
450 @file{xemacs}), and the paths to the directories where local Lisp and
451 Info files are kept. If you don't have access to the system-wide
452 directories, create your own two directories for these files, enter them
453 into the Makefile, and make sure Emacs finds the Lisp files by adding
454 the following line to @file{.emacs}:
457 (setq load-path (cons "~/path/to/lispdir" load-path))
460 @b{XEmacs users now need to install the file @file{noutline.el} from
461 the @file{xemacs} subdirectory of the Org-mode distribution. Use the
465 @b{make install-noutline}
468 @noindent Now byte-compile and install the Lisp files with the shell
476 @noindent If you want to install the info documentation, use this command:
482 @noindent Then add to @file{.emacs}:
485 ;; This line only if org-mode is not part of the X/Emacs distribution.
486 (require 'org-install)
489 @node Activation, Feedback, Installation, Introduction
493 @cindex global keybindings
494 @cindex keybindings, global
497 @b{Important:} @i{If you use copy-and-paste to copy lisp code from the
498 PDF documentation as viewed by Acrobat reader to your .emacs file, the
499 single quote character comes out incorrectly and the code will not work.
500 You need to fix the single quotes by hand, or copy from Info
504 Add the following lines to your @file{.emacs} file. The last two lines
505 define @emph{global} keys for the commands @command{org-store-link} and
506 @command{org-agenda} - please choose suitable keys yourself.
509 ;; The following lines are always needed. Choose your own keys.
510 (add-to-list 'auto-mode-alist '("\\.org\\'" . org-mode))
511 (global-set-key "\C-cl" 'org-store-link)
512 (global-set-key "\C-ca" 'org-agenda)
515 Furthermore, you must activate @code{font-lock-mode} in org-mode
516 buffers, because significant functionality depends on font-locking being
517 active. You can do this with either one of the following two lines
518 (XEmacs user must use the second option):
520 (global-font-lock-mode 1) ; for all buffers
521 (add-hook 'org-mode-hook 'turn-on-font-lock) ; org-mode buffers only
524 @cindex org-mode, turning on
525 With this setup, all files with extension @samp{.org} will be put
526 into Org-mode. As an alternative, make the first line of a file look
530 MY PROJECTS -*- mode: org; -*-
533 @noindent which will select Org-mode for this buffer no matter what
534 the file's name is. See also the variable
535 @code{org-insert-mode-line-in-empty-file}.
537 @node Feedback, Conventions, Activation, Introduction
544 If you find problems with Org-mode, or if you have questions, remarks,
545 or ideas about it, please contact the maintainer @value{MAINTAINER} at
546 @value{MAINTAINEREMAIL}.
548 For bug reports, please provide as much information as possible,
549 including the version information of Emacs (@kbd{C-h v emacs-version
550 @key{RET}}) and Org-mode (@kbd{C-h v org-version @key{RET}}), as well as
551 the Org-mode related setup in @file{.emacs}. If an error occurs, a
552 backtrace can be very useful (see below on how to create one). Often a
553 small example file helps, along with clear information about:
556 @item What exactly did you do?
557 @item What did you expect to happen?
558 @item What happened instead?
560 @noindent Thank you for helping to improve this mode.
562 @subsubheading How to create a useful backtrace
564 @cindex backtrace of an error
565 If working with Org-mode produces an error with a message you don't
566 understand, you may have hit a bug. The best way to report this is by
567 providing, in addition to what was mentioned above, a @emph{Backtrace}.
568 This is information from the built-in debugger about where and how the
569 error occurred. Here is how to produce a useful backtrace:
573 Start a fresh Emacs or XEmacs, and make sure that it will load the
574 original Lisp code in @file{org.el} instead of the compiled version in
575 @file{org.elc}. The backtrace contains much more information if it is
576 produced with uncompiled code. To do this, either rename @file{org.elc}
577 to something else before starting Emacs, or ask Emacs explicitly to load
578 @file{org.el} by using the command line
580 emacs -l /path/to/org.el
583 Go to the @code{Options} menu and select @code{Enter Debugger on Error}
584 (XEmacs has this option in the @code{Troubleshooting} sub-menu).
586 Do whatever you have to do to hit the error. Don't forget to
587 document the steps you take.
589 When you hit the error, a @file{*Backtrace*} buffer will appear on the
590 screen. Save this buffer to a file (for example using @kbd{C-x C-w}) and
591 attach it to your bug report.
594 @node Conventions, , Feedback, Introduction
595 @section Typesetting conventions used in this manual
597 Org-mode uses three types of keywords: TODO keywords, tags, and property
598 names. In this manual we use the following conventions:
603 TODO keywords are written with all capitals, even if they are
607 User-defined tags are written in lowercase; built-in tags with special
608 meaning are written with all capitals.
611 User-defined properties are capitalized; built-in properties with
612 special meaning are written with all capitals.
615 @node Document structure, Tables, Introduction, Top
616 @chapter Document Structure
617 @cindex document structure
618 @cindex structure of document
620 Org-mode is based on outline mode and provides flexible commands to
621 edit the structure of the document.
624 * Outlines:: Org-mode is based on outline-mode
625 * Headlines:: How to typeset org-tree headlines
626 * Visibility cycling:: Show and hide, much simplified
627 * Motion:: Jumping to other headlines
628 * Structure editing:: Changing sequence and level of headlines
629 * Archiving:: Move done task trees to a different place
630 * Sparse trees:: Matches embedded in context
631 * Plain lists:: Additional structure within an entry
632 * Drawers:: Tucking stuff away
633 * orgstruct-mode:: Structure editing outside Org-mode
636 @node Outlines, Headlines, Document structure, Document structure
641 Org-mode is implemented on top of outline-mode. Outlines allow a
642 document to be organized in a hierarchical structure, which (at least
643 for me) is the best representation of notes and thoughts. An overview
644 of this structure is achieved by folding (hiding) large parts of the
645 document to show only the general document structure and the parts
646 currently being worked on. Org-mode greatly simplifies the use of
647 outlines by compressing the entire show/hide functionality into a single
648 command @command{org-cycle}, which is bound to the @key{TAB} key.
650 @node Headlines, Visibility cycling, Outlines, Document structure
655 Headlines define the structure of an outline tree. The headlines in
656 Org-mode start with one or more stars, on the left margin@footnote{See
657 the variable @code{org-special-ctrl-a/e} to configure special behavior
658 of @kbd{C-a} and @kbd{C-e} in headlines.}. For example:
668 * Another top level headline
671 @noindent Some people find the many stars too noisy and would prefer an
672 outline that has whitespace followed by a single star as headline
673 starters. @ref{Clean view} describes a setup to realize this.
675 An empty line after the end of a subtree is considered part of it and
676 will be hidden when the subtree is folded. However, if you leave at
677 least two empty lines, one empty line will remain visible after folding
678 the subtree, in order to structure the collapsed view. See the
679 variable @code{org-cycle-separator-lines} to modify this behavior.
681 @node Visibility cycling, Motion, Headlines, Document structure
682 @section Visibility cycling
683 @cindex cycling, visibility
684 @cindex visibility cycling
685 @cindex trees, visibility
686 @cindex show hidden text
689 Outlines make it possible to hide parts of the text in the buffer.
690 Org-mode uses just two commands, bound to @key{TAB} and
691 @kbd{S-@key{TAB}} to change the visibility in the buffer.
693 @cindex subtree visibility states
694 @cindex subtree cycling
695 @cindex folded, subtree visibility state
696 @cindex children, subtree visibility state
697 @cindex subtree, subtree visibility state
701 @emph{Subtree cycling}: Rotate current subtree among the states
704 ,-> FOLDED -> CHILDREN -> SUBTREE --.
705 '-----------------------------------'
708 The cursor must be on a headline for this to work@footnote{see, however,
709 the option @code{org-cycle-emulate-tab}.}. When the cursor is at the
710 beginning of the buffer and the first line is not a headline, then
711 @key{TAB} actually runs global cycling (see below)@footnote{see the
712 option @code{org-cycle-global-at-bob}.}. Also when called with a prefix
713 argument (@kbd{C-u @key{TAB}}), global cycling is invoked.
715 @cindex global visibility states
716 @cindex global cycling
717 @cindex overview, global visibility state
718 @cindex contents, global visibility state
719 @cindex show all, global visibility state
723 @emph{Global cycling}: Rotate the entire buffer among the states
726 ,-> OVERVIEW -> CONTENTS -> SHOW ALL --.
727 '--------------------------------------'
730 When @kbd{S-@key{TAB}} is called with a numerical prefix N, the CONTENTS
731 view up to headlines of level N will be shown.
732 Note that inside tables, @kbd{S-@key{TAB}} jumps to the previous field.
734 @cindex show all, command
740 Reveal context around point, showing the current entry, the following
741 heading and the hierarchy above. Useful for working near a location
742 that has been exposed by a sparse tree command (@pxref{Sparse trees}) or
743 an agenda command (@pxref{Agenda commands}). With prefix arg show, on
746 level, all sibling headings.
749 Show the current subtree in an indirect buffer@footnote{The indirect
752 (@pxref{Indirect Buffers,,,emacs,GNU Emacs Manual})
755 (see the Emacs manual for more information about indirect buffers)
757 will contain the entire buffer, but will be narrowed to the current
758 tree. Editing the indirect buffer will also change the original buffer,
759 but without affecting visibility in that buffer.}. With numerical
760 prefix ARG, go up to this level and then take that tree. If ARG is
761 negative, go up that many levels. With @kbd{C-u} prefix, do not remove
762 the previously used indirect buffer.
765 When Emacs first visits an Org-mode file, the global state is set to
766 OVERVIEW, i.e. only the top level headlines are visible. This can be
767 configured through the variable @code{org-startup-folded}, or on a
768 per-file basis by adding one of the following lines anywhere in the
777 @node Motion, Structure editing, Visibility cycling, Document structure
779 @cindex motion, between headlines
780 @cindex jumping, to headlines
781 @cindex headline navigation
782 The following commands jump to other headlines in the buffer.
793 Next heading same level.
796 Previous heading same level.
799 Backward to higher level heading.
802 Jump to a different place without changing the current outline
803 visibility. Shows the document structure in a temporary buffer, where
804 you can use the following keys to find your destination:
806 @key{TAB} @r{Cycle visibility.}
807 @key{down} / @key{up} @r{Next/previous visible headline.}
808 n / p @r{Next/previous visible headline.}
809 f / b @r{Next/previous headline same level.}
811 0-9 @r{Digit argument.}
812 @key{RET} @r{Select this location.}
816 @node Structure editing, Archiving, Motion, Document structure
817 @section Structure editing
818 @cindex structure editing
819 @cindex headline, promotion and demotion
820 @cindex promotion, of subtrees
821 @cindex demotion, of subtrees
822 @cindex subtree, cut and paste
823 @cindex pasting, of subtrees
824 @cindex cutting, of subtrees
825 @cindex copying, of subtrees
826 @cindex subtrees, cut and paste
831 Insert new heading with same level as current. If the cursor is in a
832 plain list item, a new item is created (@pxref{Plain lists}). To force
833 creation of a new headline, use a prefix arg, or first press @key{RET}
834 to get to the beginning of the next line. When this command is used in
835 the middle of a line, the line is split and the rest of the line becomes
836 the new headline. If the command is used at the beginning of a
837 headline, the new headline is created before the current line. If at
838 the beginning of any other line, the content of that line is made the
839 new heading. If the command is used at the end of a folded subtree
840 (i.e. behind the ellipses at the end of a headline), then a headline
841 like the current one will be inserted after the end of the subtree.
844 Insert a new heading after the current subtree, same level as the
845 current headline. This command works from anywhere in the entry.
846 @kindex M-S-@key{RET}
848 Insert new TODO entry with same level as current heading.
851 Promote current heading by one level.
852 @kindex M-@key{right}
854 Demote current heading by one level.
855 @kindex M-S-@key{left}
857 Promote the current subtree by one level.
858 @kindex M-S-@key{right}
859 @item M-S-@key{right}
860 Demote the current subtree by one level.
863 Move subtree up (swap with previous subtree of same
865 @kindex M-S-@key{down}
867 Move subtree down (swap with next subtree of same level).
872 Kill subtree, i.e. remove it from buffer but save in kill ring.
873 With prefix arg, kill N sequential subtrees.
876 Copy subtree to kill ring. With prefix arg, copy N sequential subtrees.
879 Yank subtree from kill ring. This does modify the level of the subtree to
880 make sure the tree fits in nicely at the yank position. The yank
881 level can also be specified with a prefix arg, or by yanking after a
882 headline marker like @samp{****}.
885 Refile entry to a different location. @xref{Refiling notes}.
888 Sort same-level entries. When there is an active region, all entries in
889 the region will be sorted. Otherwise the children of the current
890 headline are sorted. The command prompts for the sorting method, which
891 can be alphabetically, numerically, by time (using the first time stamp
892 in each entry), by priority, and each of these in reverse order. You
893 can also supply your own function to extract the sorting key. With a
894 @kbd{C-u} prefix, sorting will be case-sensitive. With two @kbd{C-u
895 C-u} prefixes, duplicate entries will also be removed.
898 @cindex region, active
899 @cindex active region
900 @cindex transient-mark-mode
901 When there is an active region (transient-mark-mode), promotion and
902 demotion work on all headlines in the region. To select a region of
903 headlines, it is best to place both point and mark at the beginning of a
904 line, mark at the beginning of the first headline, and point at the line
905 just after the last headline to change. Note that when the cursor is
906 inside a table (@pxref{Tables}), the Meta-Cursor keys have different
909 @node Archiving, Sparse trees, Structure editing, Document structure
913 When a project represented by a (sub)tree is finished, you may want
914 to move the tree out of the way and to stop it from contributing to the
915 agenda. Org-mode knows two ways of archiving. You can mark a tree with
916 the ARCHIVE tag, or you can move an entire (sub)tree to a different
920 * ARCHIVE tag:: Marking a tree as inactive
921 * Moving subtrees:: Moving a tree to an archive file
924 @node ARCHIVE tag, Moving subtrees, Archiving, Archiving
925 @subsection The ARCHIVE tag
926 @cindex internal archiving
928 A headline that is marked with the ARCHIVE tag (@pxref{Tags}) stays at
929 its location in the outline tree, but behaves in the following way:
932 It does not open when you attempt to do so with a visibility cycling
933 command (@pxref{Visibility cycling}). You can force cycling archived
934 subtrees with @kbd{C-@key{TAB}}, or by setting the option
935 @code{org-cycle-open-archived-trees}. Also normal outline commands like
936 @code{show-all} will open archived subtrees.
938 During sparse tree construction (@pxref{Sparse trees}), matches in
939 archived subtrees are not exposed, unless you configure the option
940 @code{org-sparse-tree-open-archived-trees}.
942 During agenda view construction (@pxref{Agenda views}), the content of
943 archived trees is ignored unless you configure the option
944 @code{org-agenda-skip-archived-trees}.
946 Archived trees are not exported (@pxref{Exporting}), only the headline
947 is. Configure the details using the variable
948 @code{org-export-with-archived-trees}.
951 The following commands help managing the ARCHIVE tag:
956 Toggle the ARCHIVE tag for the current headline. When the tag is set,
957 the headline changes to a shadowish face, and the subtree below it is
959 @kindex C-u C-c C-x C-a
960 @item C-u C-c C-x C-a
961 Check if any direct children of the current headline should be archived.
962 To do this, each subtree is checked for open TODO entries. If none are
963 found, the command offers to set the ARCHIVE tag for the child. If the
964 cursor is @emph{not} on a headline when this command is invoked, the
965 level 1 trees will be checked.
968 Cycle a tree even if it is tagged with ARCHIVE.
971 @node Moving subtrees, , ARCHIVE tag, Archiving
972 @subsection Moving subtrees
973 @cindex external archiving
975 Once an entire project is finished, you may want to move it to a
976 different location, either in the current file, or even in a different
977 file, the archive file.
982 Archive the subtree starting at the cursor position to the location
983 given by @code{org-archive-location}. Context information that could be
984 lost like the file name, the category, inherited tags, and the todo
985 state will be store as properties in the entry.
986 @kindex C-u C-c C-x C-s
987 @item C-u C-c C-x C-s
988 Check if any direct children of the current headline could be moved to
989 the archive. To do this, each subtree is checked for open TODO entries.
990 If none are found, the command offers to move it to the archive
991 location. If the cursor is @emph{not} on a headline when this command
992 is invoked, the level 1 trees will be checked.
995 @cindex archive locations
996 The default archive location is a file in the same directory as the
997 current file, with the name derived by appending @file{_archive} to the
998 current file name. For information and examples on how to change this,
999 see the documentation string of the variable
1000 @code{org-archive-location}. There is also an in-buffer option for
1001 setting this variable, for example@footnote{For backward compatibility,
1002 the following also works: If there are several such lines in a file,
1003 each specifies the archive location for the text below it. The first
1004 such line also applies to any text before its definition. However,
1005 using this method is @emph{strongly} deprecated as it is incompatible
1006 with the outline structure of the document. The correct method for
1007 setting multiple archive locations in a buffer is using a property.}:
1010 #+ARCHIVE: %s_done::
1014 If you would like to have a special ARCHIVE location for a single entry
1015 or a (sub)tree, give the entry an @code{:ARCHIVE:} property with the
1016 location as the value (@pxref{Properties and columns}).
1018 When a subtree is moved, it receives a number of special properties that
1019 record context information like the file from where the entry came, it's
1020 outline path the archiving time etc. Configure the variable
1021 @code{org-archive-save-context-info} to adjust the amount of information
1024 @node Sparse trees, Plain lists, Archiving, Document structure
1025 @section Sparse trees
1026 @cindex sparse trees
1027 @cindex trees, sparse
1028 @cindex folding, sparse trees
1029 @cindex occur, command
1031 An important feature of Org-mode is the ability to construct
1032 @emph{sparse trees} for selected information in an outline tree, so that
1033 the entire document is folded as much as possible, but the selected
1034 information is made visible along with the headline structure above
1035 it@footnote{See also the variables @code{org-show-hierarchy-above},
1036 @code{org-show-following-heading}, and @code{org-show-siblings} for
1037 detailed control on how much context is shown around each match.}. Just
1038 try it out and you will see immediately how it works.
1040 Org-mode contains several commands creating such trees, all these
1041 commands can be accessed through a dispatcher:
1046 This prompts for an extra key to select a sparse-tree creating command.
1049 Occur. Prompts for a regexp and shows a sparse tree with all matches.
1050 If the match is in a headline, the headline is made visible. If the
1051 match is in the body of an entry, headline and body are made visible.
1052 In order to provide minimal context, also the full hierarchy of
1053 headlines above the match is shown, as well as the headline following
1054 the match. Each match is also highlighted; the highlights disappear
1055 when the buffer is changed by an editing command, or by pressing
1056 @kbd{C-c C-c}. When called with a @kbd{C-u} prefix argument, previous
1057 highlights are kept, so several calls to this command can be stacked.
1061 For frequently used sparse trees of specific search strings, you can
1062 use the variable @code{org-agenda-custom-commands} to define fast
1063 keyboard access to specific sparse trees. These commands will then be
1064 accessible through the agenda dispatcher (@pxref{Agenda dispatcher}).
1068 (setq org-agenda-custom-commands
1069 '(("f" occur-tree "FIXME")))
1072 @noindent will define the key @kbd{C-c a f} as a shortcut for creating
1073 a sparse tree matching the string @samp{FIXME}.
1075 The other sparse tree commands select headings based on TODO keywords,
1076 tags, or properties and will be discussed later in this manual.
1079 @cindex printing sparse trees
1080 @cindex visible text, printing
1081 To print a sparse tree, you can use the Emacs command
1082 @code{ps-print-buffer-with-faces} which does not print invisible parts
1083 of the document @footnote{This does not work under XEmacs, because
1084 XEmacs uses selective display for outlining, not text properties.}.
1085 Or you can use the command @kbd{C-c C-e v} to export only the visible
1086 part of the document and print the resulting file.
1088 @node Plain lists, Drawers, Sparse trees, Document structure
1089 @section Plain lists
1091 @cindex lists, plain
1092 @cindex lists, ordered
1093 @cindex ordered lists
1095 Within an entry of the outline tree, hand-formatted lists can provide
1096 additional structure. They also provide a way to create lists of
1097 checkboxes (@pxref{Checkboxes}). Org-mode supports editing such lists,
1098 and the HTML exporter (@pxref{Exporting}) parses and formats them.
1100 Org-mode knows ordered and unordered lists. Unordered list items start
1101 with @samp{-}, @samp{+}, or @samp{*}@footnote{When using @samp{*} as a
1102 bullet, lines must be indented or they will be seen as top-level
1103 headlines. Also, when you are hiding leading stars to get a clean
1104 outline view, plain list items starting with a star are visually
1105 indistinguishable from true headlines. In short: even though @samp{*}
1106 is supported, it may be better to not use it for plain list items.} as
1107 bullets. Ordered list items start with a numeral followed by either a
1108 period or a right parenthesis, such as @samp{1.} or @samp{1)}. Items
1109 belonging to the same list must have the same indentation on the first
1110 line. In particular, if an ordered list reaches number @samp{10.}, then
1111 the 2--digit numbers must be written left-aligned with the other numbers
1112 in the list. Indentation also determines the end of a list item. It
1113 ends before the next line that is indented like the bullet/number, or
1114 less. Empty lines are part of the previous item, so you can have
1115 several paragraphs in one item. If you would like an empty line to
1116 terminate all currently open plain lists, configure the variable
1117 @code{org-empty-line-terminates-plain-lists}. Here is an example:
1121 ** Lord of the Rings
1122 My favorite scenes are (in this order)
1123 1. The attack of the Rohirrim
1124 2. Eowyns fight with the witch king
1125 + this was already my favorite scene in the book
1126 + I really like Miranda Otto.
1127 3. Peter Jackson being shot by Legolas
1129 He makes a really funny face when it happens.
1130 But in the end, not individual scenes matter but the film as a whole.
1134 Org-mode supports these lists by tuning filling and wrapping commands to
1135 deal with them correctly@footnote{Org-mode only changes the filling
1136 settings for Emacs. For XEmacs, you should use Kyle E. Jones'
1137 @file{filladapt.el}. To turn this on, put into @file{.emacs}:
1138 @code{(require 'filladapt)}}.
1140 The following commands act on items when the cursor is in the first line
1141 of an item (the line with the bullet or number).
1146 Items can be folded just like headline levels if you set the variable
1147 @code{org-cycle-include-plain-lists}. The level of an item is then
1148 given by the indentation of the bullet/number. Items are always
1149 subordinate to real headlines, however; the hierarchies remain
1150 completely separated.
1152 If @code{org-cycle-include-plain-lists} has not been set, @key{TAB}
1153 fixes the indentation of the curent line in a heuristic way.
1156 Insert new item at current level. With prefix arg, force a new heading
1157 (@pxref{Structure editing}). If this command is used in the middle of a
1158 line, the line is @emph{split} and the rest of the line becomes the new
1159 item. If this command is executed in the @emph{whitespace before a bullet or
1160 number}, the new item is created @emph{before} the current item. If the
1161 command is executed in the white space before the text that is part of
1162 an item but does not contain the bullet, a bullet is added to the
1164 @kindex M-S-@key{RET}
1166 Insert a new item with a checkbox (@pxref{Checkboxes}).
1168 @kindex S-@key{down}
1171 Jump to the previous/next item in the current list.
1172 @kindex M-S-@key{up}
1173 @kindex M-S-@key{down}
1175 @itemx M-S-@key{down}
1176 Move the item including subitems up/down (swap with previous/next item
1177 of same indentation). If the list is ordered, renumbering is
1179 @kindex M-S-@key{left}
1180 @kindex M-S-@key{right}
1181 @item M-S-@key{left}
1182 @itemx M-S-@key{right}
1183 Decrease/increase the indentation of the item, including subitems.
1184 Initially, the item tree is selected based on current indentation.
1185 When these commands are executed several times in direct succession,
1186 the initially selected region is used, even if the new indentation
1187 would imply a different hierarchy. To use the new hierarchy, break
1188 the command chain with a cursor motion or so.
1191 If there is a checkbox (@pxref{Checkboxes}) in the item line, toggle the
1192 state of the checkbox. If not, this command makes sure that all the
1193 items on this list level use the same bullet. Furthermore, if this is
1194 an ordered list, make sure the numbering is ok.
1197 Cycle the entire list level through the different itemize/enumerate
1198 bullets (@samp{-}, @samp{+}, @samp{*}, @samp{1.}, @samp{1)}).
1199 With prefix arg, select the nth bullet from this list.
1202 @node Drawers, orgstruct-mode, Plain lists, Document structure
1205 @cindex visibility cycling, drawers
1207 Sometimes you want to keep information associated with an entry, but you
1208 normally don't want to see it. For this, Org-mode has @emph{drawers}.
1209 Drawers need to be configured with the variable
1210 @code{org-drawers}@footnote{You can define drawers on a per-file basis
1211 with a line like @code{#+DRAWERS: HIDDEN PROPERTIES STATE}}. Drawers
1215 ** This is a headline
1216 Still outside the drawer
1218 This is inside the drawer.
1223 Visibility cycling (@pxref{Visibility cycling}) on the headline will
1224 hide and show the entry, but keep the drawer collapsed to a single line.
1225 In order to look inside the drawer, you need to move the cursor to the
1226 drawer line and press @key{TAB} there. Org-mode uses a drawer for
1227 storing properties (@pxref{Properties and columns}).
1229 @node orgstruct-mode, , Drawers, Document structure
1230 @section The Orgstruct minor mode
1231 @cindex orgstruct-mode
1232 @cindex minor mode for structure editing
1234 If you like the intuitive way the Org-mode structure editing and list
1235 formatting works, you might want to use these commands in other modes
1236 like text-mode or mail-mode as well. The minor mode Orgstruct-mode
1237 makes this possible. You can always toggle the mode with @kbd{M-x
1238 orgstruct-mode}. To turn it on by default, for example in mail mode,
1242 (add-hook 'mail-mode-hook 'turn-on-orgstruct)
1245 When this mode is active and the cursor is on a line that looks to
1246 Org-mode like a headline of the first line of a list item, most
1247 structure editing commands will work, even if the same keys normally
1248 have different functionality in the major mode you are using. If the
1249 cursor is not in one of those special lines, Orgstruct-mode lurks
1250 silently in the shadow.
1252 @node Tables, Hyperlinks, Document structure, Top
1255 @cindex editing tables
1257 Org-mode comes with a fast and intuitive table editor. Spreadsheet-like
1258 calculations are supported in connection with the Emacs @file{calc}
1261 (@pxref{Top,Calc,,calc,Gnu Emacs Calculator Manual}).
1264 (see the Emacs Calculator manual for more information about the Emacs
1269 * Built-in table editor:: Simple tables
1270 * Narrow columns:: Stop wasting space in tables
1271 * Column groups:: Grouping to trigger vertical lines
1272 * orgtbl-mode:: The table editor as minor mode
1273 * The spreadsheet:: The table editor has spreadsheet capabilities.
1276 @node Built-in table editor, Narrow columns, Tables, Tables
1277 @section The built-in table editor
1278 @cindex table editor, built-in
1280 Org-mode makes it easy to format tables in plain ASCII. Any line with
1281 @samp{|} as the first non-whitespace character is considered part of a
1282 table. @samp{|} is also the column separator. A table might look like
1286 | Name | Phone | Age |
1287 |-------+-------+-----|
1288 | Peter | 1234 | 17 |
1289 | Anna | 4321 | 25 |
1292 A table is re-aligned automatically each time you press @key{TAB} or
1293 @key{RET} or @kbd{C-c C-c} inside the table. @key{TAB} also moves to
1294 the next field (@key{RET} to the next row) and creates new table rows
1295 at the end of the table or before horizontal lines. The indentation
1296 of the table is set by the first line. Any line starting with
1297 @samp{|-} is considered as a horizontal separator line and will be
1298 expanded on the next re-align to span the whole table width. So, to
1299 create the above table, you would only type
1306 @noindent and then press @key{TAB} to align the table and start filling in
1309 When typing text into a field, Org-mode treats @key{DEL},
1310 @key{Backspace}, and all character keys in a special way, so that
1311 inserting and deleting avoids shifting other fields. Also, when
1312 typing @emph{immediately after the cursor was moved into a new field
1313 with @kbd{@key{TAB}}, @kbd{S-@key{TAB}} or @kbd{@key{RET}}}, the
1314 field is automatically made blank. If this behavior is too
1315 unpredictable for you, configure the variables
1316 @code{org-enable-table-editor} and @code{org-table-auto-blank-field}.
1319 @tsubheading{Creation and conversion}
1322 Convert the active region to table. If every line contains at least one
1323 TAB character, the function assumes that the material is tab separated.
1324 If every line contains a comma, comma-separated values (CSV) are assumed.
1325 If not, lines are split at whitespace into fields. You can use a prefix
1326 argument to force a specific separator: @kbd{C-u} forces CSV, @kbd{C-u
1327 C-u} forces TAB, and a numeric argument N indicates that at least N
1328 consequtive spaces, or alternatively a TAB will be the separator.
1330 If there is no active region, this command creates an empty Org-mode
1331 table. But it's easier just to start typing, like
1332 @kbd{|Name|Phone|Age @key{RET} |- @key{TAB}}.
1334 @tsubheading{Re-aligning and field motion}
1337 Re-align the table without moving the cursor.
1341 Re-align the table, move to the next field. Creates a new row if
1346 Re-align, move to previous field.
1350 Re-align the table and move down to next row. Creates a new row if
1351 necessary. At the beginning or end of a line, @key{RET} still does
1352 NEWLINE, so it can be used to split a table.
1354 @tsubheading{Column and row editing}
1355 @kindex M-@key{left}
1356 @kindex M-@key{right}
1358 @itemx M-@key{right}
1359 Move the current column left/right.
1361 @kindex M-S-@key{left}
1362 @item M-S-@key{left}
1363 Kill the current column.
1365 @kindex M-S-@key{right}
1366 @item M-S-@key{right}
1367 Insert a new column to the left of the cursor position.
1370 @kindex M-@key{down}
1373 Move the current row up/down.
1375 @kindex M-S-@key{up}
1377 Kill the current row or horizontal line.
1379 @kindex M-S-@key{down}
1380 @item M-S-@key{down}
1381 Insert a new row above (with arg: below) the current row.
1385 Insert a horizontal line below current row. With prefix arg, the line
1386 is created above the current line.
1390 Sort the table lines in the region. The position of point indicates the
1391 column to be used for sorting, and the range of lines is the range
1392 between the nearest horizontal separator lines, or the entire table. If
1393 point is before the first column, you will be prompted for the sorting
1394 column. If there is an active region, the mark specifies the first line
1395 and the sorting column, while point should be in the last line to be
1396 included into the sorting. The command prompts for the sorting type
1397 (alphabetically, numerically, or by time). When called with a prefix
1398 argument, alphabetic sorting will be case-sensitive.
1400 @tsubheading{Regions}
1403 Copy a rectangular region from a table to a special clipboard. Point
1404 and mark determine edge fields of the rectangle. The process ignores
1405 horizontal separator lines.
1409 Copy a rectangular region from a table to a special clipboard, and
1410 blank all fields in the rectangle. So this is the ``cut'' operation.
1414 Paste a rectangular region into a table.
1415 The upper right corner ends up in the current field. All involved fields
1416 will be overwritten. If the rectangle does not fit into the present table,
1417 the table is enlarged as needed. The process ignores horizontal separator
1422 Wrap several fields in a column like a paragraph. If there is an active
1423 region, and both point and mark are in the same column, the text in the
1424 column is wrapped to minimum width for the given number of lines. A
1425 prefix ARG may be used to change the number of desired lines. If there
1426 is no region, the current field is split at the cursor position and the
1427 text fragment to the right of the cursor is prepended to the field one
1428 line down. If there is no region, but you specify a prefix ARG, the
1429 current field is made blank, and the content is appended to the field
1432 @tsubheading{Calculations}
1433 @cindex formula, in tables
1434 @cindex calculations, in tables
1435 @cindex region, active
1436 @cindex active region
1437 @cindex transient-mark-mode
1440 Sum the numbers in the current column, or in the rectangle defined by
1441 the active region. The result is shown in the echo area and can
1442 be inserted with @kbd{C-y}.
1446 When current field is empty, copy from first non-empty field above.
1447 When not empty, copy current field down to next row and move cursor
1448 along with it. Depending on the variable
1449 @code{org-table-copy-increment}, integer field values will be
1450 incremented during copy. This key is also used by CUA-mode
1451 (@pxref{Cooperation}).
1453 @tsubheading{Miscellaneous}
1456 Edit the current field in a separate window. This is useful for fields
1457 that are not fully visible (@pxref{Narrow columns}). When called with a
1458 @kbd{C-u} prefix, just make the full field visible, so that it can be
1461 @item M-x org-table-import
1462 Import a file as a table. The table should be TAB- or whitespace
1463 separated. Useful, for example, to import a spreadsheet table or data
1464 from a database, because these programs generally can write
1465 TAB-separated text files. This command works by inserting the file into
1466 the buffer and then converting the region to a table. Any prefix
1467 argument is passed on to the converter, which uses it to determine the
1470 Tables can also be imported by pasting tabular text into the org-mode
1471 buffer, selecting the pasted text with @kbd{C-x C-x} and then using the
1472 @kbd{C-c |} command (see above under @i{Creation and conversion}.
1474 @item M-x org-table-export
1475 Export the table as a TAB-separated file. Useful for data exchange with,
1476 for example, spreadsheet or database programs.
1479 If you don't like the automatic table editor because it gets in your
1480 way on lines which you would like to start with @samp{|}, you can turn
1484 (setq org-enable-table-editor nil)
1487 @noindent Then the only table command that still works is
1488 @kbd{C-c C-c} to do a manual re-align.
1490 @node Narrow columns, Column groups, Built-in table editor, Tables
1491 @section Narrow columns
1492 @cindex narrow columns in tables
1494 The width of columns is automatically determined by the table editor.
1495 Sometimes a single field or a few fields need to carry more text,
1496 leading to inconveniently wide columns. To limit@footnote{This feature
1497 does not work on XEmacs.} the width of a column, one field anywhere in
1498 the column may contain just the string @samp{<N>} where @samp{N} is an
1499 integer specifying the width of the column in characters. The next
1500 re-align will then set the width of this column to no more than this
1505 |---+------------------------------| |---+--------|
1507 | 1 | one | | 1 | one |
1508 | 2 | two | ----\ | 2 | two |
1509 | 3 | This is a long chunk of text | ----/ | 3 | This=> |
1510 | 4 | four | | 4 | four |
1511 |---+------------------------------| |---+--------|
1516 Fields that are wider become clipped and end in the string @samp{=>}.
1517 Note that the full text is still in the buffer, it is only invisible.
1518 To see the full text, hold the mouse over the field - a tool-tip window
1519 will show the full content. To edit such a field, use the command
1520 @kbd{C-c `} (that is @kbd{C-c} followed by the backquote). This will
1521 open a new window with the full field. Edit it and finish with @kbd{C-c
1524 When visiting a file containing a table with narrowed columns, the
1525 necessary character hiding has not yet happened, and the table needs to
1526 be aligned before it looks nice. Setting the option
1527 @code{org-startup-align-all-tables} will realign all tables in a file
1528 upon visiting, but also slow down startup. You can also set this option
1529 on a per-file basis with:
1536 @node Column groups, orgtbl-mode, Narrow columns, Tables
1537 @section Column groups
1538 @cindex grouping columns in tables
1540 When Org-mode exports tables, it does so by default without vertical
1541 lines because that is visually more satisfying in general. Occasionally
1542 however, vertical lines can be useful to structure a table into groups
1543 of columns, much like horizontal lines can do for groups of rows. In
1544 order to specify column groups, you can use a special row where the
1545 first field contains only @samp{/}. The further fields can either
1546 contain @samp{<} to indicate that this column should start a group,
1547 @samp{>} to indicate the end of a column, or @samp{<>} to make a column
1548 a group of its own. Boundaries between colum groups will upon export be
1549 marked with vertical lines. Here is an example:
1552 | | N | N^2 | N^3 | N^4 | sqrt(n) | sqrt[4](N) |
1553 |---+----+-----+-----+-----+---------+------------|
1554 | / | <> | < | | > | < | > |
1555 | # | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 |
1556 | # | 2 | 4 | 8 | 16 | 1.4142 | 1.1892 |
1557 | # | 3 | 9 | 27 | 81 | 1.7321 | 1.3161 |
1558 |---+----+-----+-----+-----+---------+------------|
1559 #+TBLFM: $3=$2^2::$4=$2^3::$5=$2^4::$6=sqrt($2)::$7=sqrt(sqrt(($2))
1562 It is also sufficient to just insert the colum group starters after
1563 every vertical line you'd like to have:
1566 | N | N^2 | N^3 | N^4 | sqrt(n) | sqrt[4](N) |
1567 |----+-----+-----+-----+---------+------------|
1571 @node orgtbl-mode, The spreadsheet, Column groups, Tables
1572 @section The Orgtbl minor mode
1574 @cindex minor mode for tables
1576 If you like the intuitive way the Org-mode table editor works, you
1577 might also want to use it in other modes like text-mode or mail-mode.
1578 The minor mode Orgtbl-mode makes this possible. You can always toggle
1579 the mode with @kbd{M-x orgtbl-mode}. To turn it on by default, for
1580 example in mail mode, use
1583 (add-hook 'mail-mode-hook 'turn-on-orgtbl)
1586 Furthermore, with some special setup, it is possible to maintain tables
1587 in arbitrary syntax with Orgtbl-mode. For example, it is possible to
1588 construct La@TeX{} tables with the underlying ease and power of
1589 Orgtbl-mode, including spreadsheet capabilities. For details, see
1590 @ref{Tables in arbitrary syntax}.
1592 @node The spreadsheet, , orgtbl-mode, Tables
1593 @section The spreadsheet
1594 @cindex calculations, in tables
1595 @cindex spreadsheet capabilities
1596 @cindex @file{calc} package
1598 The table editor makes use of the Emacs @file{calc} package to implement
1599 spreadsheet-like capabilities. It can also evaluate Emacs Lisp forms to
1600 derive fields from other fields. While fully featured, Org-mode's
1601 implementation is not identical to other spreadsheets. For example,
1602 Org-mode knows the concept of a @emph{column formula} that will be
1603 applied to all non-header fields in a column without having to copy the
1604 formula to each relevant field.
1607 * References:: How to refer to another field or range
1608 * Formula syntax for Calc:: Using Calc to compute stuff
1609 * Formula syntax for Lisp:: Writing formulas in Emacs Lisp
1610 * Field formulas:: Formulas valid for a single field
1611 * Column formulas:: Formulas valid for an entire column
1612 * Editing and debugging formulas:: Fixing formulas
1613 * Updating the table:: Recomputing all dependent fields
1614 * Advanced features:: Field names, parameters and automatic recalc
1617 @node References, Formula syntax for Calc, The spreadsheet, The spreadsheet
1618 @subsection References
1621 To compute fields in the table from other fields, formulas must
1622 reference other fields or ranges. In Org-mode, fields can be referenced
1623 by name, by absolute coordinates, and by relative coordinates. To find
1624 out what the coordinates of a field are, press @kbd{C-c ?} in that
1625 field, or press @kbd{C-c @}} to toggle the display of a grid.
1627 @subsubheading Field references
1628 @cindex field references
1629 @cindex references, to fields
1631 Formulas can reference the value of another field in two ways. Like in
1632 any other spreadsheet, you may reference fields with a letter/number
1633 combination like @code{B3}, meaning the 2nd field in the 3rd row.
1634 @c Such references are always fixed to that field, they don't change
1635 @c when you copy and paste a formula to a different field. So
1636 @c Org-mode's @code{B3} behaves like @code{$B$3} in other spreadsheets.
1639 Org-mode also uses another, more general operator that looks like this:
1645 Column references can be absolute like @samp{1}, @samp{2},...@samp{N},
1646 or relative to the current column like @samp{+1} or @samp{-2}.
1648 The row specification only counts data lines and ignores horizontal
1649 separator lines (hlines). You can use absolute row numbers
1650 @samp{1}...@samp{N}, and row numbers relative to the current row like
1651 @samp{+3} or @samp{-1}. Or specify the row relative to one of the
1652 hlines: @samp{I} refers to the first hline@footnote{Note that only
1653 hlines are counted that @emph{separate} table lines. If the table
1654 starts with a hline above the header, it does not count.}, @samp{II} to
1655 the second etc. @samp{-I} refers to the first such line above the
1656 current line, @samp{+I} to the first such line below the current line.
1657 You can also write @samp{III+2} which is the second data line after the
1658 third hline in the table. Relative row numbers like @samp{-3} will not
1659 cross hlines if the current line is too close to the hline. Instead,
1660 the value directly at the hline is used.
1662 @samp{0} refers to the current row and column. Also, if you omit
1663 either the column or the row part of the reference, the current
1664 row/column is implied.
1666 Org-mode's references with @emph{unsigned} numbers are fixed references
1667 in the sense that if you use the same reference in the formula for two
1668 different fields, the same field will be referenced each time.
1669 Org-mode's references with @emph{signed} numbers are floating
1670 references because the same reference operator can reference different
1671 fields depending on the field being calculated by the formula.
1673 Here are a few examples:
1676 @@2$3 @r{2nd row, 3rd column}
1677 C2 @r{same as previous}
1678 $5 @r{column 5 in the current row}
1679 E& @r{same as previous}
1680 @@2 @r{current column, row 2}
1681 @@-1$-3 @r{the field one row up, three columns to the left}
1682 @@-I$2 @r{field just under hline above current row, column 2}
1685 @subsubheading Range references
1686 @cindex range references
1687 @cindex references, to ranges
1689 You may reference a rectangular range of fields by specifying two field
1690 references connected by two dots @samp{..}. If both fields are in the
1691 current row, you may simply use @samp{$2..$7}, but if at least one field
1692 is in a different row, you need to use the general @code{@@row$column}
1693 format at least for the first field (i.e the reference must start with
1694 @samp{@@} in order to be interpreted correctly). Examples:
1697 $1..$3 @r{First three fields in the current row.}
1698 $P..$Q @r{Range, using column names (see under Advanced)}
1699 @@2$1..@@4$3 @r{6 fields between these two fields.}
1700 A2..C4 @r{Same as above.}
1701 @@-1$-2..@@-1 @r{3 numbers from the column to the left, 2 up to current row}
1704 @noindent Range references return a vector of values that can be fed
1705 into Calc vector functions. Empty fields in ranges are normally
1706 suppressed, so that the vector contains only the non-empty fields (but
1707 see the @samp{E} mode switch below). If there are no non-empty fields,
1708 @samp{[0]} is returned to avoid syntax errors in formulas.
1710 @subsubheading Named references
1711 @cindex named references
1712 @cindex references, named
1713 @cindex name, of column or field
1714 @cindex constants, in calculations
1716 @samp{$name} is interpreted as the name of a column, parameter or
1717 constant. Constants are defined globally through the variable
1718 @code{org-table-formula-constants}, and locally (for the file) through a
1722 #+CONSTANTS: c=299792458. pi=3.14 eps=2.4e-6
1726 Also properties (@pxref{Properties and columns}) can be used as
1727 constants in table formulas: For a property @samp{:Xyz:} use the name
1728 @samp{$PROP_Xyz}, and the property will be searched in the current
1729 outline entry and in the hierarchy above it. If you have the
1730 @file{constants.el} package, it will also be used to resolve constants,
1731 including natural constants like @samp{$h} for Planck's constant, and
1732 units like @samp{$km} for kilometers@footnote{@file{Constant.el} can
1733 supply the values of constants in two different unit systems, @code{SI}
1734 and @code{cgs}. Which one is used depends on the value of the variable
1735 @code{constants-unit-system}. You can use the @code{#+STARTUP} options
1736 @code{constSI} and @code{constcgs} to set this value for the current
1737 buffer.}. Column names and parameters can be specified in special table
1738 lines. These are described below, see @ref{Advanced features}. All
1739 names must start with a letter, and further consist of letters and
1742 @node Formula syntax for Calc, Formula syntax for Lisp, References, The spreadsheet
1743 @subsection Formula syntax for Calc
1744 @cindex formula syntax, Calc
1745 @cindex syntax, of formulas
1747 A formula can be any algebraic expression understood by the Emacs
1748 @file{Calc} package. @b{Note that @file{calc} has the
1749 non-standard convention that @samp{/} has lower precedence than
1750 @samp{*}, so that @samp{a/b*c} is interpreted as @samp{a/(b*c)}.} Before
1751 evaluation by @code{calc-eval} (@pxref{Calling Calc from
1752 Your Programs,calc-eval,Calling calc from Your Lisp Programs,calc,GNU
1753 Emacs Calc Manual}),
1754 @c FIXME: The link to the calc manual in HTML does not work.
1755 variable substitution takes place according to the rules described above.
1756 @cindex vectors, in table calculations
1757 The range vectors can be directly fed into the calc vector functions
1758 like @samp{vmean} and @samp{vsum}.
1760 @cindex format specifier
1761 @cindex mode, for @file{calc}
1762 A formula can contain an optional mode string after a semicolon. This
1763 string consists of flags to influence Calc and other modes during
1764 execution. By default, Org-mode uses the standard calc modes (precision
1765 12, angular units degrees, fraction and symbolic modes off. The display
1766 format, however, has been changed to @code{(float 5)} to keep tables
1767 compact. The default settings can be configured using the variable
1768 @code{org-calc-default-modes}.
1771 p20 @r{switch the internal precision to 20 digits}
1772 n3 s3 e2 f4 @r{normal, scientific, engineering, or fixed display format}
1773 D R @r{angle modes: degrees, radians}
1774 F S @r{fraction and symbolic modes}
1775 N @r{interpret all fields as numbers, use 0 for non-numbers}
1776 T @r{force text interpretation}
1777 E @r{keep empty fields in ranges}
1781 In addition, you may provide a @code{printf} format specifier to
1782 reformat the final result. A few examples:
1785 $1+$2 @r{Sum of first and second field}
1786 $1+$2;%.2f @r{Same, format result to two decimals}
1787 exp($2)+exp($1) @r{Math functions can be used}
1788 $0;%.1f @r{Reformat current cell to 1 decimal}
1789 ($3-32)*5/9 @r{Degrees F -> C conversion}
1790 $c/$1/$cm @r{Hz -> cm conversion, using @file{constants.el}}
1791 tan($1);Dp3s1 @r{Compute in degrees, precision 3, display SCI 1}
1792 sin($1);Dp3%.1e @r{Same, but use printf specifier for display}
1793 vmean($2..$7) @r{Compute column range mean, using vector function}
1794 vmean($2..$7);EN @r{Same, but treat empty fields as 0}
1795 taylor($3,x=7,2) @r{taylor series of $3, at x=7, second degree}
1798 Calc also contains a complete set of logical operations. For example
1801 if($1<20,teen,string("")) @r{``teen'' if age $1 less than 20, else empty}
1804 @node Formula syntax for Lisp, Field formulas, Formula syntax for Calc, The spreadsheet
1805 @subsection Emacs Lisp forms as formulas
1806 @cindex Lisp forms, as table formulas
1808 It is also possible to write a formula in Emacs Lisp; this can be useful
1809 for string manipulation and control structures, if the Calc's
1810 functionality is not enough. If a formula starts with a single quote
1811 followed by an opening parenthesis, then it is evaluated as a lisp form.
1812 The evaluation should return either a string or a number. Just as with
1813 @file{calc} formulas, you can specify modes and a printf format after a
1814 semicolon. With Emacs Lisp forms, you need to be concious about the way
1815 field references are interpolated into the form. By default, a
1816 reference will be interpolated as a Lisp string (in double quotes)
1817 containing the field. If you provide the @samp{N} mode switch, all
1818 referenced elements will be numbers (non-number fields will be zero) and
1819 interpolated as Lisp numbers, without quotes. If you provide the
1820 @samp{L} flag, all fields will be interpolated literally, without quotes.
1821 I.e., if you want a reference to be interpreted as a string by the Lisp
1822 form, enclode the reference operator itself in double quotes, like
1823 @code{"$3"}. Ranges are inserted as space-separated fields, so you can
1824 embed them in list or vector syntax. A few examples, note how the
1825 @samp{N} mode is used when we do computations in lisp.
1828 @r{Swap the first two characters of the content of column 1}
1829 '(concat (substring $1 1 2) (substring $1 0 1) (substring $1 2))
1830 @r{Add columns 1 and 2, equivalent to the Calc's @code{$1+$2}}
1832 @r{Compute the sum of columns 1-4, like Calc's @code{vsum($1..$4)}}
1833 '(apply '+ '($1..$4));N
1836 @node Field formulas, Column formulas, Formula syntax for Lisp, The spreadsheet
1837 @subsection Field formulas
1838 @cindex field formula
1839 @cindex formula, for individual table field
1841 To assign a formula to a particular field, type it directly into the
1842 field, preceded by @samp{:=}, for example @samp{:=$1+$2}. When you
1843 press @key{TAB} or @key{RET} or @kbd{C-c C-c} with the cursor still in
1844 the field, the formula will be stored as the formula for this field,
1845 evaluated, and the current field replaced with the result.
1847 Formulas are stored in a special line starting with @samp{#+TBLFM:}
1848 directly below the table. If you typed the equation in the 4th field of
1849 the 3rd data line in the table, the formula will look like
1850 @samp{@@3$4=$1+$2}. When inserting/deleting/swapping column and rows
1851 with the appropriate commands, @i{absolute references} (but not relative
1852 ones) in stored formulas are modified in order to still reference the
1853 same field. Of cause this is not true if you edit the table structure
1854 with normal editing commands - then you must fix the equations yourself.
1856 Instead of typing an equation into the field, you may also use the
1862 Install a new formula for the current field. The command prompts for a
1863 formula, with default taken from the @samp{#+TBLFM:} line, applies
1864 it to the current field and stores it.
1867 @node Column formulas, Editing and debugging formulas, Field formulas, The spreadsheet
1868 @subsection Column formulas
1869 @cindex column formula
1870 @cindex formula, for table column
1872 Often in a table, the same formula should be used for all fields in a
1873 particular column. Instead of having to copy the formula to all fields
1874 in that column, org-mode allows to assign a single formula to an entire
1875 column. If the table contains horizontal separator hlines, everything
1876 before the first such line is considered part of the table @emph{header}
1877 and will not be modified by column formulas.
1879 To assign a formula to a column, type it directly into any field in the
1880 column, preceded by an equal sign, like @samp{=$1+$2}. When you press
1881 @key{TAB} or @key{RET} or @kbd{C-c C-c} with the cursor still in the
1882 field, the formula will be stored as the formula for the current column,
1883 evaluated and the current field replaced with the result. If the field
1884 contains only @samp{=}, the previously stored formula for this column is
1885 used. For each column, Org-mode will only remember the most recently
1886 used formula. In the @samp{TBLFM:} line, column formulas will look like
1889 Instead of typing an equation into the field, you may also use the
1895 Install a new formula for the current column and replace current field
1896 with the result of the formula. The command prompts for a formula, with
1897 default taken from the @samp{#+TBLFM} line, applies it to the current
1898 field and stores it. With a numerical prefix (e.g. @kbd{C-5 C-c =})
1899 will apply it to that many consecutive fields in the current column.
1903 @node Editing and debugging formulas, Updating the table, Column formulas, The spreadsheet
1904 @subsection Editing and Debugging formulas
1905 @cindex formula editing
1906 @cindex editing, of table formulas
1908 You can edit individual formulas in the minibuffer or directly in the
1909 field. Org-mode can also prepare a special buffer with all active
1910 formulas of a table. When offering a formula for editing, Org-mode
1911 converts references to the standard format (like @code{B3} or @code{D&})
1912 if possible. If you prefer to only work with the internal format (like
1913 @code{@@3$2} or @code{$4}), configure the variable
1914 @code{org-table-use-standard-references}.
1921 Edit the formula associated with the current column/field in the
1922 minibuffer. See @ref{Column formulas} and @ref{Field formulas}.
1923 @kindex C-u C-u C-c =
1925 Re-insert the active formula (either a
1926 field formula, or a column formula) into the current field, so that you
1927 can edit it directly in the field. The advantage over editing in the
1928 minibuffer is that you can use the command @kbd{C-c ?}.
1931 While editing a formula in a table field, highlight the field(s)
1932 referenced by the reference at the cursor position in the formula.
1935 Toggle the display of row and column numbers for a table, using
1936 overlays. These are updated each time the table is aligned, you can
1937 force it with @kbd{C-c C-c}.
1940 Toggle the formula debugger on and off. See below.
1943 Edit all formulas for the current table in a special buffer, where the
1944 formulas will be displayed one per line. If the current field has an
1945 active formula, the cursor in the formula editor will mark it.
1946 While inside the special buffer, Org-mode will automatically highlight
1947 any field or range reference at the cursor position. You may edit,
1948 remove and add formulas, and use the following commands:
1954 Exit the formula editor and store the modified formulas. With @kbd{C-u}
1955 prefix, also apply the new formulas to the entire table.
1958 Exit the formula editor without installing changes.
1961 Toggle all references in the formula editor between standard (like
1962 @code{B3}) and internal (like @code{@@3$2}).
1965 Pretty-print or indent lisp formula at point. When in a line containing
1966 a lisp formula, format the formula according to Emacs Lisp rules.
1967 Another @key{TAB} collapses the formula back again. In the open
1968 formula, @key{TAB} re-indents just like in Emacs-lisp-mode.
1971 Complete Lisp symbols, just like in Emacs-lisp-mode.
1973 @kindex S-@key{down}
1974 @kindex S-@key{left}
1975 @kindex S-@key{right}
1976 @item S-@key{up}/@key{down}/@key{left}/@key{right}
1977 Shift the reference at point. For example, if the reference is
1978 @code{B3} and you press @kbd{S-@key{right}}, it will become @code{C3}.
1979 This also works for relative references, and for hline references.
1980 @kindex M-S-@key{up}
1981 @kindex M-S-@key{down}
1982 @item M-S-@key{up}/@key{down}
1983 Move the test line for column formulas in the Org-mode buffer up and
1986 @kindex M-@key{down}
1987 @item M-@key{up}/@key{down}
1988 Scroll the window displaying the table.
1991 Turn the coordinate grid in the table on and off.
1995 Making a table field blank does not remove the formula associated with
1996 the field, because that is stored in a different line (the @samp{TBLFM}
1997 line) - during the next recalculation the field will be filled again.
1998 To remove a formula from a field, you have to give an empty reply when
1999 prompted for the formula, or to edit the @samp{#+TBLFM} line.
2002 You may edit the @samp{#+TBLFM} directly and re-apply the changed
2003 equations with @kbd{C-c C-c} in that line, or with the normal
2004 recalculation commands in the table.
2006 @subsubheading Debugging formulas
2007 @cindex formula debugging
2008 @cindex debugging, of table formulas
2009 When the evaluation of a formula leads to an error, the field content
2010 becomes the string @samp{#ERROR}. If you would like see what is going
2011 on during variable substitution and calculation in order to find a bug,
2012 turn on formula debugging in the @code{Tbl} menu and repeat the
2013 calculation, for example by pressing @kbd{C-u C-u C-c = @key{RET}} in a
2014 field. Detailed information will be displayed.
2016 @node Updating the table, Advanced features, Editing and debugging formulas, The spreadsheet
2017 @subsection Updating the Table
2018 @cindex recomputing table fields
2019 @cindex updating, table
2021 Recalculation of a table is normally not automatic, but needs to be
2022 triggered by a command. See @ref{Advanced features} for a way to make
2023 recalculation at least semi-automatically.
2025 In order to recalculate a line of a table or the entire table, use the
2031 Recalculate the current row by first applying the stored column formulas
2032 from left to right, and all field formulas in the current row.
2038 Recompute the entire table, line by line. Any lines before the first
2039 hline are left alone, assuming that these are part of the table header.
2041 @kindex C-u C-u C-c *
2042 @kindex C-u C-u C-c C-c
2044 @itemx C-u C-u C-c C-c
2045 Iterate the table by recomputing it until no further changes occur.
2046 This may be necessary if some computed fields use the value of other
2047 fields that are computed @i{later} in the calculation sequence.
2050 @node Advanced features, , Updating the table, The spreadsheet
2051 @subsection Advanced features
2053 If you want the recalculation of fields to happen automatically, or if
2054 you want to be able to assign @i{names} to fields and columns, you need
2055 to reserve the first column of the table for special marking characters.
2059 Rotate the calculation mark in first column through the states @samp{},
2060 @samp{#}, @samp{*}, @samp{!}, @samp{$}. The meaning of these characters
2061 is discussed below. When there is an active region, change all marks in
2065 Here is an example of a table that collects exam results of students and
2066 makes use of these features:
2070 |---+---------+--------+--------+--------+-------+------|
2071 | | Student | Prob 1 | Prob 2 | Prob 3 | Total | Note |
2072 |---+---------+--------+--------+--------+-------+------|
2073 | ! | | P1 | P2 | P3 | Tot | |
2074 | # | Maximum | 10 | 15 | 25 | 50 | 10.0 |
2075 | ^ | | m1 | m2 | m3 | mt | |
2076 |---+---------+--------+--------+--------+-------+------|
2077 | # | Peter | 10 | 8 | 23 | 41 | 8.2 |
2078 | # | Sara | 6 | 14 | 19 | 39 | 7.8 |
2079 | # | Sam | 2 | 4 | 3 | 9 | 1.8 |
2080 |---+---------+--------+--------+--------+-------+------|
2081 | | Average | | | | 29.7 | |
2082 | ^ | | | | | at | |
2083 | $ | max=50 | | | | | |
2084 |---+---------+--------+--------+--------+-------+------|
2085 #+TBLFM: $6=vsum($P1..$P3)::$7=10*$Tot/$max;%.1f::$at=vmean(@@-II..@@-I);%.1f
2089 @noindent @b{Important}: Please note that for these special tables,
2090 recalculating the table with @kbd{C-u C-c *} will only affect rows that
2091 are marked @samp{#} or @samp{*}, and fields that have a formula assigned
2092 to the field itself. The column formulas are not applied in rows with
2095 @cindex marking characters, tables
2096 The marking characters have the following meaning:
2099 The fields in this line define names for the columns, so that you may
2100 refer to a column as @samp{$Tot} instead of @samp{$6}.
2102 This row defines names for the fields @emph{above} the row. With such
2103 a definition, any formula in the table may use @samp{$m1} to refer to
2104 the value @samp{10}. Also, if you assign a formula to a names field, it
2105 will be stored as @samp{$name=...}.
2107 Similar to @samp{^}, but defines names for the fields in the row
2110 Fields in this row can define @emph{parameters} for formulas. For
2111 example, if a field in a @samp{$} row contains @samp{max=50}, then
2112 formulas in this table can refer to the value 50 using @samp{$max}.
2113 Parameters work exactly like constants, only that they can be defined on
2116 Fields in this row are automatically recalculated when pressing
2117 @key{TAB} or @key{RET} or @kbd{S-@key{TAB}} in this row. Also, this row
2118 is selected for a global recalculation with @kbd{C-u C-c *}. Unmarked
2119 lines will be left alone by this command.
2121 Selects this line for global recalculation with @kbd{C-u C-c *}, but
2122 not for automatic recalculation. Use this when automatic
2123 recalculation slows down editing too much.
2125 Unmarked lines are exempt from recalculation with @kbd{C-u C-c *}.
2126 All lines that should be recalculated should be marked with @samp{#}
2129 Do not export this line. Useful for lines that contain the narrowing
2133 Finally, just to whet your appetite on what can be done with the
2134 fantastic @file{calc} package, here is a table that computes the Taylor
2135 series of degree @code{n} at location @code{x} for a couple of
2140 |---+-------------+---+-----+--------------------------------------|
2141 | | Func | n | x | Result |
2142 |---+-------------+---+-----+--------------------------------------|
2143 | # | exp(x) | 1 | x | 1 + x |
2144 | # | exp(x) | 2 | x | 1 + x + x^2 / 2 |
2145 | # | exp(x) | 3 | x | 1 + x + x^2 / 2 + x^3 / 6 |
2146 | # | x^2+sqrt(x) | 2 | x=0 | x*(0.5 / 0) + x^2 (2 - 0.25 / 0) / 2 |
2147 | # | x^2+sqrt(x) | 2 | x=1 | 2 + 2.5 x - 2.5 + 0.875 (x - 1)^2 |
2148 | * | tan(x) | 3 | x | 0.0175 x + 1.77e-6 x^3 |
2149 |---+-------------+---+-----+--------------------------------------|
2150 #+TBLFM: $5=taylor($2,$4,$3);n3
2154 @node Hyperlinks, TODO items, Tables, Top
2158 Like HTML, Org-mode provides links inside a file, external links to
2159 other files, Usenet articles, emails, and much more.
2162 * Link format:: How links in Org-mode are formatted
2163 * Internal links:: Links to other places in the current file
2164 * External links:: URL-like links to the world
2165 * Handling links:: Creating, inserting and following
2166 * Using links outside Org-mode:: Linking from my C source code?
2167 * Link abbreviations:: Shortcuts for writing complex links
2168 * Search options:: Linking to a specific location
2169 * Custom searches:: When the default search is not enough
2172 @node Link format, Internal links, Hyperlinks, Hyperlinks
2173 @section Link format
2175 @cindex format, of links
2177 Org-mode will recognize plain URL-like links and activate them as
2178 clickable links. The general link format, however, looks like this:
2181 [[link][description]] @r{or alternatively} [[link]]
2184 Once a link in the buffer is complete (all brackets present), Org-mode
2185 will change the display so that @samp{description} is displayed instead
2186 of @samp{[[link][description]]} and @samp{link} is displayed instead of
2187 @samp{[[link]]}. Links will be highlighted in the face @code{org-link},
2188 which by default is an underlined face. You can directly edit the
2189 visible part of a link. Note that this can be either the @samp{link}
2190 part (if there is no description) or the @samp{description} part. To
2191 edit also the invisible @samp{link} part, use @kbd{C-c C-l} with the
2194 If you place the cursor at the beginning or just behind the end of the
2195 displayed text and press @key{BACKSPACE}, you will remove the
2196 (invisible) bracket at that location. This makes the link incomplete
2197 and the internals are again displayed as plain text. Inserting the
2198 missing bracket hides the link internals again. To show the
2199 internal structure of all links, use the menu entry
2200 @code{Org->Hyperlinks->Literal links}.
2202 @node Internal links, External links, Link format, Hyperlinks
2203 @section Internal links
2204 @cindex internal links
2205 @cindex links, internal
2206 @cindex targets, for links
2208 If the link does not look like a URL, it is considered to be internal in
2209 the current file. Links such as @samp{[[My Target]]} or @samp{[[My
2210 Target][Find my target]]} lead to a text search in the current file.
2211 The link can be followed with @kbd{C-c C-o} when the cursor is on the
2212 link, or with a mouse click (@pxref{Handling links}). The preferred
2213 match for such a link is a dedicated target: the same string in double
2214 angular brackets. Targets may be located anywhere; sometimes it is
2215 convenient to put them into a comment line. For example
2221 @noindent In HTML export (@pxref{HTML export}), such targets will become
2222 named anchors for direct access through @samp{http} links@footnote{Note
2223 that text before the first headline is usually not exported, so the
2224 first such target should be after the first headline.}.
2226 If no dedicated target exists, Org-mode will search for the words in the
2227 link. In the above example the search would be for @samp{my target}.
2228 Links starting with a star like @samp{*My Target} restrict the search to
2229 headlines. When searching, Org-mode will first try an exact match, but
2230 then move on to more and more lenient searches. For example, the link
2231 @samp{[[*My Targets]]} will find any of the following:
2235 ** TODO my targets are bright
2236 ** my 20 targets are
2239 To insert a link targeting a headline, in-buffer completion can be used.
2240 Just type a star followed by a few optional letters into the buffer and
2241 press @kbd{M-@key{TAB}}. All headlines in the current buffer will be
2242 offered as completions. @xref{Handling links}, for more commands
2245 Following a link pushes a mark onto Org-mode's own mark ring. You can
2246 return to the previous position with @kbd{C-c &}. Using this command
2247 several times in direct succession goes back to positions recorded
2251 * Radio targets:: Make targets trigger links in plain text.
2254 @node Radio targets, , Internal links, Internal links
2255 @subsection Radio targets
2256 @cindex radio targets
2257 @cindex targets, radio
2258 @cindex links, radio targets
2260 Org-mode can automatically turn any occurrences of certain target names
2261 in normal text into a link. So without explicitly creating a link, the
2262 text connects to the target radioing its position. Radio targets are
2263 enclosed by triple angular brackets. For example, a target @samp{<<<My
2264 Target>>>} causes each occurrence of @samp{my target} in normal text to
2265 become activated as a link. The Org-mode file is scanned automatically
2266 for radio targets only when the file is first loaded into Emacs. To
2267 update the target list during editing, press @kbd{C-c C-c} with the
2268 cursor on or at a target.
2270 @node External links, Handling links, Internal links, Hyperlinks
2271 @section External links
2272 @cindex links, external
2273 @cindex external links
2274 @cindex links, external
2281 @cindex WANDERLUST links
2283 @cindex USENET links
2288 Org-mode supports links to files, websites, Usenet and email messages,
2289 and BBDB database entries. External links are URL-like locators. They
2290 start with a short identifying string followed by a colon. There can be
2291 no space after the colon. The following list shows examples for each
2295 http://www.astro.uva.nl/~dominik @r{on the web}
2296 file:/home/dominik/images/jupiter.jpg @r{file, absolute path}
2297 file:papers/last.pdf @r{file, relative path}
2298 news:comp.emacs @r{Usenet link}
2299 mailto:adent@@galaxy.net @r{Mail link}
2300 vm:folder @r{VM folder link}
2301 vm:folder#id @r{VM message link}
2302 vm://myself@@some.where.org/folder#id @r{VM on remote machine}
2303 wl:folder @r{WANDERLUST folder link}
2304 wl:folder#id @r{WANDERLUST message link}
2305 mhe:folder @r{MH-E folder link}
2306 mhe:folder#id @r{MH-E message link}
2307 rmail:folder @r{RMAIL folder link}
2308 rmail:folder#id @r{RMAIL message link}
2309 gnus:group @r{GNUS group link}
2310 gnus:group#id @r{GNUS article link}
2311 bbdb:Richard Stallman @r{BBDB link}
2312 shell:ls *.org @r{A shell command}
2313 elisp:(find-file-other-frame "Elisp.org") @r{An elisp form to evaluate}
2316 A link should be enclosed in double brackets and may contain a
2317 descriptive text to be displayed instead of the url (@pxref{Link
2318 format}), for example:
2321 [[http://www.gnu.org/software/emacs/][GNU Emacs]]
2325 If the description is a file name or URL that points to an image, HTML
2326 export (@pxref{HTML export}) will inline the image as a clickable
2327 button. If there is no description at all and the link points to an
2329 that image will be inlined into the exported HTML file.
2331 @cindex angular brackets, around links
2332 @cindex plain text external links
2333 Org-mode also finds external links in the normal text and activates them
2334 as links. If spaces must be part of the link (for example in
2335 @samp{bbdb:Richard Stallman}), or if you need to remove ambiguities
2336 about the end of the link, enclose them in angular brackets.
2338 @node Handling links, Using links outside Org-mode, External links, Hyperlinks
2339 @section Handling links
2340 @cindex links, handling
2342 Org-mode provides methods to create a link in the correct syntax, to
2343 insert it into an org-mode file, and to follow the link.
2347 @cindex storing links
2349 Store a link to the current location. This is a @emph{global} command
2350 which can be used in any buffer to create a link. The link will be
2351 stored for later insertion into an Org-mode buffer (see below). For
2352 Org-mode files, if there is a @samp{<<target>>} at the cursor, the link
2353 points to the target. Otherwise it points to the current headline. For
2354 VM, RMAIL, WANDERLUST, MH-E, GNUS and BBDB buffers, the link will
2355 indicate the current article/entry. For W3 and W3M buffers, the link
2356 goes to the current URL. For any other files, the link will point to
2357 the file, with a search string (@pxref{Search options}) pointing to the
2358 contents of the current line. If there is an active region, the
2359 selected words will form the basis of the search string. If the
2360 automatically created link is not working correctly or accurately
2361 enough, you can write custom functions to select the search string and
2362 to do the search for particular file types - see @ref{Custom searches}.
2363 The key binding @kbd{C-c l} is only a suggestion - see @ref{Installation}.
2366 @cindex link completion
2367 @cindex completion, of links
2368 @cindex inserting links
2370 Insert a link. This prompts for a link to be inserted into the buffer.
2371 You can just type a link, using text for an internal link, or one of the
2372 link type prefixes mentioned in the examples above. All links stored
2373 during the current session are part of the history for this prompt, so
2374 you can access them with @key{up} and @key{down} (or @kbd{M-p/n}).
2375 Completion, on the other hand, will help you to insert valid link
2376 prefixes like @samp{http:} or @samp{ftp:}, including the prefixes
2377 defined through link abbreviations (@pxref{Link abbreviations}). The
2378 link will be inserted into the buffer@footnote{After insertion of a
2379 stored link, the link will be removed from the list of stored links. To
2380 keep it in the list later use, use a triple @kbd{C-u} prefix to @kbd{C-c
2381 C-l}, or configure the option
2382 @code{org-keep-stored-link-after-insertion}.}, along with a descriptive
2383 text. If some text was selected when this command is called, the
2384 selected text becomes the default description.@* Note that you don't
2385 have to use this command to insert a link. Links in Org-mode are plain
2386 text, and you can type or paste them straight into the buffer. By using
2387 this command, the links are automatically enclosed in double brackets,
2388 and you will be asked for the optional descriptive text.
2390 @c If the link is a @samp{file:} link and
2391 @c the linked file is located in the same directory as the current file or
2392 @c a subdirectory of it, the path of the file will be inserted relative to
2393 @c the current directory.
2396 @cindex file name completion
2397 @cindex completion, of file names
2399 When @kbd{C-c C-l} is called with a @kbd{C-u} prefix argument, a link to
2400 a file will be inserted and you may use file name completion to select
2401 the name of the file. The path to the file is inserted relative to the
2402 directory of the current org file, if the linked file is in the current
2403 directory or in a subdirectory of it, or if the path is written relative
2404 to the current directory using @samp{../}. Otherwise an absolute path
2405 is used, if possible with @samp{~/} for your home directory. You can
2406 force an absolute path with two @kbd{C-u} prefixes.
2408 @item C-c C-l @r{(with cursor on existing link)}
2409 When the cursor is on an existing link, @kbd{C-c C-l} allows you to edit the
2410 link and description parts of the link.
2412 @cindex following links
2415 Open link at point. This will launch a web browser for URLs (using
2416 @command{browse-url-at-point}), run vm/mh-e/wanderlust/rmail/gnus/bbdb
2417 for the corresponding links, and execute the command in a shell link.
2418 When the cursor is on an internal link, this commands runs the
2419 corresponding search. When the cursor is on a TAG list in a headline,
2420 it creates the corresponding TAGS view. If the cursor is on a time
2421 stamp, it compiles the agenda for that date. Furthermore, it will visit
2422 text and remote files in @samp{file:} links with Emacs and select a
2423 suitable application for local non-text files. Classification of files
2424 is based on file extension only. See option @code{org-file-apps}. If
2425 you want to override the default application and visit the file with
2426 Emacs, use a @kbd{C-u} prefix.
2432 On links, @kbd{mouse-2} will open the link just as @kbd{C-c C-o}
2433 would. Under Emacs 22, also @kbd{mouse-1} will follow a link.
2437 Like @kbd{mouse-2}, but force file links to be opened with Emacs, and
2438 internal links to be displayed in another window@footnote{See the
2439 variable @code{org-display-internal-link-with-indirect-buffer}}.
2444 Push the current position onto the mark ring, to be able to return
2445 easily. Commands following an internal link do this automatically.
2447 @cindex links, returning to
2450 Jump back to a recorded position. A position is recorded by the
2451 commands following internal links, and by @kbd{C-c %}. Using this
2452 command several times in direct succession moves through a ring of
2453 previously recorded positions.
2457 @cindex links, finding next/previous
2460 Move forward/backward to the next link in the buffer. At the limit of
2461 the buffer, the search fails once, and then wraps around. The key
2462 bindings for this are really too long, you might want to bind this also
2463 to @kbd{C-n} and @kbd{C-p}
2465 (add-hook 'org-load-hook
2467 (define-key 'org-mode-map "\C-n" 'org-next-link)
2468 (define-key 'org-mode-map "\C-p" 'org-previous-link)))
2472 @node Using links outside Org-mode, Link abbreviations, Handling links, Hyperlinks
2473 @section Using links outside Org-mode
2475 You can insert and follow links that have Org-mode syntax not only in
2476 Org-mode, but in any Emacs buffer. For this, you should create two
2477 global commands, like this (please select suitable global keys
2481 (global-set-key "\C-c L" 'org-insert-link-global)
2482 (global-set-key "\C-c o" 'org-open-at-point-global)
2485 @node Link abbreviations, Search options, Using links outside Org-mode, Hyperlinks
2486 @section Link abbreviations
2487 @cindex link abbreviations
2488 @cindex abbreviation, links
2490 Long URLs can be cumbersome to type, and often many similar links are
2491 needed in a document. For this you can use link abbreviations. An
2492 abbreviated link looks like this
2495 [[linkword:tag][description]]
2499 where the tag is optional. Such abbreviations are resolved according to
2500 the information in the variable @code{org-link-abbrev-alist} that
2501 relates the linkwords to replacement text. Here is an example:
2505 (setq org-link-abbrev-alist
2506 '(("bugzilla" . "http://10.1.2.9/bugzilla/show_bug.cgi?id=")
2507 ("google" . "http://www.google.com/search?q=")
2508 ("ads" . "http://adsabs.harvard.edu/cgi-bin/
2509 nph-abs_connect?author=%s&db_key=AST")))
2513 If the replacement text contains the string @samp{%s}, it will be
2514 replaced with the tag. Otherwise the tag will be appended to the string
2515 in order to create the link. You may also specify a function that will
2516 be called with the tag as the only argument to create the link.
2518 With the above setting, you could link to a specific bug with
2519 @code{[[bugzilla:129]]}, search the web for @samp{OrgMode} with
2520 @code{[[google:OrgMode]]} and find out what the Org-mode author is
2521 doing besides Emacs hacking with @code{[[ads:Dominik,C]]}.
2523 If you need special abbreviations just for a single Org-mode buffer, you
2524 can define them in the file with
2527 #+LINK: bugzilla http://10.1.2.9/bugzilla/show_bug.cgi?id=
2528 #+LINK: google http://www.google.com/search?q=%s
2532 In-buffer completion @pxref{Completion} can be used after @samp{[} to
2533 complete link abbreviations.
2535 @node Search options, Custom searches, Link abbreviations, Hyperlinks
2536 @section Search options in file links
2537 @cindex search option in file links
2538 @cindex file links, searching
2540 File links can contain additional information to make Emacs jump to a
2541 particular location in the file when following a link. This can be a
2542 line number or a search option after a double@footnote{For backward
2543 compatibility, line numbers can also follow a single colon.} colon. For
2544 example, when the command @kbd{C-c l} creates a link (@pxref{Handling
2545 links}) to a file, it encodes the words in the current line as a search
2546 string that can be used to find this line back later when following the
2547 link with @kbd{C-c C-o}.
2549 Here is the syntax of the different ways to attach a search to a file
2550 link, together with an explanation:
2553 [[file:~/code/main.c::255]]
2554 [[file:~/xx.org::My Target]]
2555 [[file:~/xx.org::*My Target]]
2556 [[file:~/xx.org::/regexp/]]
2563 Search for a link target @samp{<<My Target>>}, or do a text search for
2564 @samp{my target}, similar to the search in internal links, see
2565 @ref{Internal links}. In HTML export (@pxref{HTML export}), such a file
2566 link will become an HTML reference to the corresponding named anchor in
2569 In an Org-mode file, restrict search to headlines.
2571 Do a regular expression search for @code{regexp}. This uses the Emacs
2572 command @code{occur} to list all matches in a separate window. If the
2573 target file is in Org-mode, @code{org-occur} is used to create a
2574 sparse tree with the matches.
2575 @c If the target file is a directory,
2576 @c @code{grep} will be used to search all files in the directory.
2579 As a degenerate case, a file link with an empty file name can be used
2580 to search the current file. For example, @code{[[file:::find me]]} does
2581 a search for @samp{find me} in the current file, just as
2582 @samp{[[find me]]} would.
2584 @node Custom searches, , Search options, Hyperlinks
2585 @section Custom Searches
2586 @cindex custom search strings
2587 @cindex search strings, custom
2589 The default mechanism for creating search strings and for doing the
2590 actual search related to a file link may not work correctly in all
2591 cases. For example, BibTeX database files have many entries like
2592 @samp{year="1993"} which would not result in good search strings,
2593 because the only unique identification for a BibTeX entry is the
2596 If you come across such a problem, you can write custom functions to set
2597 the right search string for a particular file type, and to do the search
2598 for the string in the file. Using @code{add-hook}, these functions need
2599 to be added to the hook variables
2600 @code{org-create-file-search-functions} and
2601 @code{org-execute-file-search-functions}. See the docstring for these
2602 variables for more information. Org-mode actually uses this mechanism
2603 for Bib@TeX{} database files, and you can use the corresponding code as
2604 an implementation example. Search for @samp{BibTeX links} in the source
2609 @node TODO items, Tags, Hyperlinks, Top
2613 Org-mode does not maintain TODO lists as separate documents. Instead,
2614 TODO items are an integral part of the notes file, because TODO items
2615 usually come up while taking notes! With Org-mode, simply mark any
2616 entry in a tree as being a TODO item. In this way, information is not
2617 duplicated, and the entire context from which the TODO item emerged is
2620 Of course, this technique for managing TODO items scatters them
2621 throughout your notes file. Org-mode compensates for this by providing
2622 methods to give you an overview of all the things that you have to do.
2625 * TODO basics:: Marking and displaying TODO entries
2626 * TODO extensions:: Workflow and assignments
2627 * Progress logging:: Dates and notes for progress
2628 * Priorities:: Some things are more important than others
2629 * Breaking down tasks:: Splitting a task into manageable pieces
2630 * Checkboxes:: Tick-off lists
2633 @node TODO basics, TODO extensions, TODO items, TODO items
2634 @section Basic TODO functionality
2636 Any headline becomes a TODO item when it starts with the word
2637 @samp{TODO}, for example:
2640 *** TODO Write letter to Sam Fortune
2644 The most important commands to work with TODO entries are:
2648 @cindex cycling, of TODO states
2650 Rotate the TODO state of the current item among
2653 ,-> (unmarked) -> TODO -> DONE --.
2654 '--------------------------------'
2657 The same rotation can also be done ``remotely'' from the timeline and
2658 agenda buffers with the @kbd{t} command key (@pxref{Agenda commands}).
2662 Select a specific keyword using completion or (if it has been set up)
2663 the fast selection interface. For the latter, you need to assign keys
2664 to TODO states, see @ref{Per-file keywords} and @ref{Setting tags} for
2667 @kindex S-@key{right}
2668 @kindex S-@key{left}
2671 Select the following/preceding TODO state, similar to cycling. Useful
2672 mostly if more than two TODO states are possible (@pxref{TODO
2676 @cindex sparse tree, for TODO
2679 View TODO items in a @emph{sparse tree} (@pxref{Sparse trees}). Folds
2680 the entire buffer, but shows all TODO items and the headings hierarchy
2681 above them. With prefix arg, search for a specific TODO. You will be
2682 prompted for the keyword, and you can also give a list of keywords like
2683 @code{KWD1|KWD2|...}. With numerical prefix N, show the tree for the
2684 Nth keyword in the variable @code{org-todo-keywords}. With two prefix
2685 args, find all TODO and DONE entries.
2688 Show the global TODO list. Collects the TODO items from all agenda
2689 files (@pxref{Agenda views}) into a single buffer. The new buffer will
2690 be in @code{agenda-mode}, which provides commands to examine and
2691 manipulate the TODO entries from the new buffer (@pxref{Agenda
2692 commands}). @xref{Global TODO list}, for more information.
2693 @kindex S-M-@key{RET}
2695 Insert a new TODO entry below the current one.
2698 @node TODO extensions, Progress logging, TODO basics, TODO items
2699 @section Extended use of TODO keywords
2700 @cindex extended TODO keywords
2702 By default, marked TODO entries have one of only two states: TODO and
2703 DONE. Org-mode allows you to classify TODO items in more complex ways
2704 with @emph{TODO keywords} (stored in @code{org-todo-keywords}). With
2705 special setup, the TODO keyword system can work differently in different
2708 Note that @i{tags} are another way to classify headlines in general and
2709 TODO items in particular (@pxref{Tags}).
2712 * Workflow states:: From TODO to DONE in steps
2713 * TODO types:: I do this, Fred does the rest
2714 * Multiple sets in one file:: Mixing it all, and still finding your way
2715 * Fast access to TODO states:: Single letter selection of a state
2716 * Per-file keywords:: Different files, different requirements
2717 * Faces for TODO keywords:: Highlighting states
2720 @node Workflow states, TODO types, TODO extensions, TODO extensions
2721 @subsection TODO keywords as workflow states
2722 @cindex TODO workflow
2723 @cindex workflow states as TODO keywords
2725 You can use TODO keywords to indicate different @emph{sequential} states
2726 in the process of working on an item, for example@footnote{Changing
2727 this variable only becomes effective after restarting Org-mode in a
2731 (setq org-todo-keywords
2732 '((sequence "TODO" "FEEDBACK" "VERIFY" "|" "DONE" "DELEGATED")))
2735 The vertical bar separates the TODO keywords (states that @emph{need
2736 action}) from the DONE states (which need @emph{no further action}. If
2737 you don't provide the separator bar, the last state is used as the DONE
2739 @cindex completion, of TODO keywords
2740 With this setup, the command @kbd{C-c C-t} will cycle an entry from TODO
2741 to FEEDBACK, then to VERIFY, and finally to DONE and DELEGATED. You may
2742 also use a prefix argument to quickly select a specific state. For
2743 example @kbd{C-3 C-c C-t} will change the state immediately to VERIFY.
2744 Or you can use @kbd{S-left} to go backward through the sequence. If you
2745 define many keywords, you can use in-buffer completion
2746 (@pref{Completion}) or even a special one-key selection scheme
2747 (@pxref{Fast access to TODO states}) to insert these words into the
2748 buffer. Changing a todo state can be logged with a timestamp, see
2749 @ref{Tracking TODO state changes} for more information.
2751 @node TODO types, Multiple sets in one file, Workflow states, TODO extensions
2752 @subsection TODO keywords as types
2754 @cindex names as TODO keywords
2755 @cindex types as TODO keywords
2757 The second possibility is to use TODO keywords to indicate different
2758 @emph{types} of action items. For example, you might want to indicate
2759 that items are for ``work'' or ``home''. Or, when you work with several
2760 people on a single project, you might want to assign action items
2761 directly to persons, by using their names as TODO keywords. This would
2762 be set up like this:
2765 (setq org-todo-keywords '((type "Fred" "Sara" "Lucy" "|" "DONE")))
2768 In this case, different keywords do not indicate a sequence, but rather
2769 different types. So the normal work flow would be to assign a task to a
2770 person, and later to mark it DONE. Org-mode supports this style by
2771 adapting the workings of the command @kbd{C-c C-t}@footnote{This is also
2772 true for the @kbd{t} command in the timeline and agenda buffers.}. When
2773 used several times in succession, it will still cycle through all names,
2774 in order to first select the right type for a task. But when you return
2775 to the item after some time and execute @kbd{C-c C-t} again, it will
2776 switch from any name directly to DONE. Use prefix arguments or
2777 completion to quickly select a specific name. You can also review the
2778 items of a specific TODO type in a sparse tree by using a numeric prefix
2779 to @kbd{C-c C-v}. For example, to see all things Lucy has to do, you
2780 would use @kbd{C-3 C-c C-v}. To collect Lucy's items from all agenda
2781 files into a single buffer, you would use the prefix arg as well when
2782 creating the global todo list: @kbd{C-3 C-c t}.
2784 @node Multiple sets in one file, Fast access to TODO states, TODO types, TODO extensions
2785 @subsection Multiple keyword sets in one file
2786 @cindex todo keyword sets
2788 Sometimes you may want to use different sets of TODO keywords in
2789 parallel. For example, you may want to have the basic
2790 @code{TODO}/@code{DONE}, but also a workflow for bug fixing, and a
2791 separate state indicating that an item has been canceled (so it is not
2792 DONE, but also does not require action). Your setup would then look
2796 (setq org-todo-keywords
2797 '((sequence "TODO" "|" "DONE")
2798 (sequence "REPORT" "BUG" "KNOWNCAUSE" "|" "FIXED")
2799 (sequence "|" "CANCELED")))
2802 The keywords should all be different, this helps Org-mode to keep track
2803 of which subsequence should be used for a given entry. In this setup,
2804 @kbd{C-c C-t} only operates within a subsequence, so it switches from
2805 @code{DONE} to (nothing) to @code{TODO}, and from @code{FIXED} to
2806 (nothing) to @code{REPORT}. Therefore you need a mechanism to initially
2807 select the correct sequence. Besides the obvious ways like typing a
2808 keyword or using completion, you may also apply the following commands:
2811 @kindex C-S-@key{right}
2812 @kindex C-S-@key{left}
2813 @item C-S-@key{right}
2814 @itemx C-S-@key{left}
2815 These keys jump from one TODO subset to the next. In the above example,
2816 @kbd{C-S-@key{right}} would jump from @code{TODO} or @code{DONE} to
2817 @code{REPORT}, and any of the words in the second row to @code{CANCELED}.
2818 @kindex S-@key{right}
2819 @kindex S-@key{left}
2822 @kbd{S-@key{<left>}} and @kbd{S-@key{<right>}} and walk through
2823 @emph{all} keywords from all sets, so for example @kbd{S-@key{<right>}}
2824 would switch from @code{DONE} to @code{REPORT} in the example above.
2827 @node Fast access to TODO states, Per-file keywords, Multiple sets in one file, TODO extensions
2828 @subsection Fast access to TODO states
2830 If you would like to quickly change an entry to an arbitrary TODO state
2831 instead of cycling through the states, you can set up keys for
2832 single-letter access to the states. This is done by adding the section
2833 key after each keyword, in parenthesis. For example:
2836 (setq org-todo-keywords
2837 '((sequence "TODO(t)" "|" "DONE(d)")
2838 (sequence "REPORT(r)" "BUG(b)" "KNOWNCAUSE(k)" "|" "FIXED(f)")
2839 (sequence "|" "CANCELED(c)")))
2842 If you then press @code{C-u C-c C-t} followed by the selection key, the
2843 entry will be switched to this state. @key{SPC} can be used to remove
2844 any TODO keyword from an entry. Should you like this way of selecting
2845 TODO states a lot, you might want to set the variable
2846 @code{org-use-fast-todo-selection} to @code{t} and make this behavior
2847 the default. Check also the variable
2848 @code{org-fast-tag-selection-include-todo}, it allows to change the TODO
2849 state through the tags interface (@pxref{Setting tags}), in case you
2850 like to mingle the two concepts.
2852 @node Per-file keywords, Faces for TODO keywords, Fast access to TODO states, TODO extensions
2853 @subsection Setting up keywords for individual files
2854 @cindex keyword options
2855 @cindex per-file keywords
2857 It can be very useful to use different aspects of the TODO mechanism in
2858 different files. For file-local settings, you need to add special lines
2859 to the file which set the keywords and interpretation for that file
2860 only. For example, to set one of the two examples discussed above, you
2861 need one of the following lines, starting in column zero anywhere in the
2865 #+SEQ_TODO: TODO FEEDBACK VERIFY | DONE CANCELED
2869 #+TYP_TODO: Fred Sara Lucy Mike | DONE
2872 A setup for using several sets in parallel would be:
2875 #+SEQ_TODO: TODO | DONE
2876 #+SEQ_TODO: REPORT BUG KNOWNCAUSE | FIXED
2877 #+SEQ_TODO: | CANCELED
2880 @cindex completion, of option keywords
2882 @noindent To make sure you are using the correct keyword, type
2883 @samp{#+} into the buffer and then use @kbd{M-@key{TAB}} completion.
2885 @cindex DONE, final TODO keyword
2886 Remember that the keywords after the vertical bar (or the last keyword
2887 if no bar is there) must always mean that the item is DONE (although you
2888 may use a different word). After changing one of these lines, use
2889 @kbd{C-c C-c} with the cursor still in the line to make the changes
2890 known to Org-mode@footnote{Org-mode parses these lines only when
2891 Org-mode is activated after visiting a file. @kbd{C-c C-c} with the
2892 cursor in a line starting with @samp{#+} is simply restarting Org-mode
2893 for the current buffer.}.
2895 @node Faces for TODO keywords, , Per-file keywords, TODO extensions
2896 @subsection Faces for TODO keywords
2897 @cindex faces, for TODO keywords
2899 Org-mode highlights TODO keywords with special faces: @code{org-todo}
2900 for keywords indicating that an item still has to be acted upon, and
2901 @code{org-done} for keywords indicating that an item is finished. If
2902 you are using more than 2 different states, you might want to use
2903 special faces for some of them. This can be done using the variable
2904 @code{org-todo-keyword-faces}. For example:
2907 (setq org-todo-keyword-faces
2908 '(("TODO" . org-warning)
2909 ("DEFERRED" . shadow)
2910 ("CANCELED" . (:foreground "blue" :weight bold))))
2913 While using a list with face properties as shown for CANCELED
2914 @emph{should} work, this does not aways seem to be the case. If
2915 necessary, define a special face and use that.
2918 @node Progress logging, Priorities, TODO extensions, TODO items
2919 @section Progress Logging
2920 @cindex progress logging
2921 @cindex logging, of progress
2923 Org-mode can automatically record a time stamp and possibly a note when
2924 you mark a TODO item as DONE, or even each time you change the state of
2925 a TODO item. This system is highly configurable, settings can be on a
2926 per-keyword basis and can be localized to a file or even a subtree. For
2927 information on how to clock working time for a task, see @ref{Clocking
2931 * Closing items:: When was this entry marked DONE?
2932 * Tracking TODO state changes:: When did the status change?
2935 @node Closing items, Tracking TODO state changes, Progress logging, Progress logging
2936 @subsection Closing items
2938 The most basic logging is to keep track of @emph{when} a certain TODO
2939 item was finished. This is achieved with@footnote{The corresponding
2940 in-buffer setting is: @code{#+STARTUP: logdone}}.
2943 (setq org-log-done 'time)
2947 Then each time you turn an entry from a TODO (not-done) state into any
2948 of the DONE states, a line @samp{CLOSED: [timestamp]} will be inserted
2949 just after the headline. If you turn the entry back into a TODO item
2950 through further state cycling, that line will be removed again. If you
2951 want to record a note along with the timestamp, use@footnote{The
2952 corresponding in-buffer setting is: @code{#+STARTUP: lognotedone}}
2955 (setq org-log-done 'note)
2959 You will then be prompted for a note, and that note will be stored below
2960 the entry with a @samp{Closing Note} heading.
2962 In the timeline (@pxref{Timeline}) and in the agenda
2963 (@pxref{Weekly/Daily agenda}), you can then use the @kbd{l} key to
2964 display the TODO items with a @samp{CLOSED} timestamp on each day,
2965 giving you an overview of what has been done.
2967 @node Tracking TODO state changes, , Closing items, Progress logging
2968 @subsection Tracking TODO state changes
2970 When TODO keywords are used as workflow states (@pxref{Workflow
2971 states}), you might want to keep track of when a state change occurred
2972 and maybe take a note about this change. Since it is normally too much
2973 to record a note for every state, Org-mode expects configuration on a
2974 per-keyword basis for this. This is achieved by adding special markers
2975 @samp{!} (for a time stamp) and @samp{@@} (for a note) in parenthesis
2976 after each keyword. For example, with the setting
2979 (setq org-todo-keywords
2980 '((sequence "TODO(t)" "WAIT(w@@/!)" "|" "DONE(d!)" "CANCELED(c@@)")))
2984 you not only define global TODO keywords and fast access keys, but also
2985 request that a time is recorded when the entry is turned into
2986 DONE@footnote{It is possible that Org-mode will record two time stamps
2987 when you are using both @code{org-log-done} and state change logging.
2988 However, it will never prompt for two notes - if you have configured
2989 both, the state change recording note will take precedence and cancel
2990 the @samp{Closing Note}.}, and that a special note is recorded when
2991 switching to WAIT or CANCELED. The setting for WAIT is even more
2992 special: The @samp{!} after the slash means that in addition to the note
2993 taken when entering the state, a time stamp should be recorded when
2994 @i{leaving} the WAIT state. This allows you to get a record when
2995 switching from WAIT back to TODO, without getting one when first turning
2996 an entry into a TODO.
2998 You can use the exact same syntax for setting logging preferences local
3001 #+SEQ_TODO: TODO(t) WAIT(w@@/!) | DONE(d!) CANCELED(c@@)
3004 In order to define logging settings that are local to a subtree or a
3005 single item, define a LOGGING property in this entry. Any non-empty
3006 LOGGING property resets all logging settings to nil. You may then turn
3007 on logging for this specific tree using STARTUP keywords like
3008 @code{lognotedone} or @code{logrepeat}, as well as adding state specific
3009 settings like @code{TODO(!)}. For example
3012 * TODO Log each state with only a time
3014 :LOGGING: TODO(!) WAIT(!) DONE(!) CANCELED(!)
3016 * TODO Only log when switching to WAIT, and when repeating
3018 :LOGGING: WAIT(@@) logrepeat
3020 * TODO No logging at all
3027 @node Priorities, Breaking down tasks, Progress logging, TODO items
3031 If you use Org-mode extensively, you may end up enough TODO items that
3032 it starts to make sense to prioritize them. Prioritizing can be done by
3033 placing a @emph{priority cookie} into the headline of a TODO item, like
3037 *** TODO [#A] Write letter to Sam Fortune
3041 By default, Org-mode supports three priorities: @samp{A}, @samp{B}, and
3042 @samp{C}. @samp{A} is the highest priority. An entry without a cookie
3043 is treated as priority @samp{B}. Priorities make a difference only in
3044 the agenda (@pxref{Weekly/Daily agenda}); outside the agenda, they have
3045 no inherent meaning to Org-mode.
3047 Priorities can be attached to any outline tree entries; they do not need
3053 Set the priority of the current headline. The command prompts for a
3054 priority character @samp{A}, @samp{B} or @samp{C}. When you press
3055 @key{SPC} instead, the priority cookie is removed from the headline.
3056 The priorities can also be changed ``remotely'' from the timeline and
3057 agenda buffer with the @kbd{,} command (@pxref{Agenda commands}).
3060 @kindex S-@key{down}
3063 Increase/decrease priority of current headline@footnote{See also the
3064 option @code{org-priority-start-cycle-with-default'}.}. Note that these
3065 keys are also used to modify time stamps (@pxref{Creating timestamps}).
3066 Furthermore, these keys are also used by CUA-mode (@pxref{Conflicts}).
3069 You can change the range of allowed priorities by setting the variables
3070 @code{org-highest-priority}, @code{org-lowest-priority}, and
3071 @code{org-default-priority}. For an individual buffer, you may set
3072 these values (highest, lowest, default) like this (please make sure that
3073 the highest priority is earlier in the alphabet than the lowest
3080 @node Breaking down tasks, Checkboxes, Priorities, TODO items
3081 @section Breaking tasks down into subtasks
3082 @cindex tasks, breaking down
3084 It is often advisable to break down large tasks into smaller, manageable
3085 subtasks. You can do this by creating an outline tree below a TODO
3086 item, with detailed subtasks on the tree@footnote{To keep subtasks out
3087 of the global TODO list, see the
3088 @code{org-agenda-todo-list-sublevels}.}. Another possibility is the use
3089 of checkboxes to identify (a hierarchy of) a large number of subtasks
3090 (@pxref{Checkboxes}).
3093 @node Checkboxes, , Breaking down tasks, TODO items
3097 Every item in a plain list (@pxref{Plain lists}) can be made into a
3098 checkbox by starting it with the string @samp{[ ]}. This feature is
3099 similar to TODO items (@pxref{TODO items}), but is more lightweight.
3100 Checkboxes are not included into the global TODO list, so they are often
3101 great to split a task into a number of simple steps. Or you can use
3102 them in a shopping list. To toggle a checkbox, use @kbd{C-c C-c}, or
3103 use the mouse (thanks to Piotr Zielinski's @file{org-mouse.el}).
3105 Here is an example of a checkbox list.
3108 * TODO Organize party [2/4]
3109 - [-] call people [1/3]
3114 - [ ] think about what music to play
3115 - [X] talk to the neighbors
3118 Checkboxes work hierarchically, so if a checkbox item has children that
3119 are checkboxes, toggling one of the children checkboxes will make the
3120 parent checkbox reflect if none, some, or all o the children are
3123 @cindex statistics, for checkboxes
3124 @cindex checkbox statistics
3125 The @samp{[2/4]} and @samp{[1/3]} in the first and second line are
3126 cookies indicating how many checkboxes present in this entry have been
3127 checked off, and the total number of checkboxes are present. This can
3128 give you an idea on how many checkboxes remain, even without opening a
3129 folded entry. The cookies can be placed into a headline or into (the
3130 first line of) a plain list item. Each cookie covers all checkboxes
3131 structurally below the headline/item on which the cookie appear. You
3132 have to insert the cookie yourself by typing either @samp{[/]} or
3133 @samp{[%]}. With @samp{[/]} you get an @samp{n out of m} result, as in
3134 the examples above. With @samp{[%]} you get information about the
3135 percentage of checkboxes checked (in the above example, this would be
3136 @samp{[50%]} and @samp{[33%]}, respectively).
3138 @noindent The following commands work with checkboxes:
3143 Toggle checkbox at point. With prefix argument, set it to @samp{[-]},
3144 which is considered to be an intermediate state.
3147 Toggle checkbox at point.
3150 If there is an active region, toggle the first checkbox in the region
3151 and set all remaining boxes to the same status as the first. If you
3152 want to toggle all boxes in the region independently, use a prefix
3155 If the cursor is in a headline, toggle checkboxes in the region between
3156 this headline and the next (so @emph{not} the entire subtree).
3158 If there is no active region, just toggle the checkbox at point.
3160 @kindex M-S-@key{RET}
3162 Insert a new item with a checkbox.
3163 This works only if the cursor is already in a plain list item
3164 (@pxref{Plain lists}).
3167 Update the checkbox statistics in the current outline entry. When
3168 called with a @kbd{C-u} prefix, update the entire file. Checkbox
3169 statistic cookies are updated automatically if you toggle checkboxes
3170 with @kbd{C-c C-c} and make new ones with @kbd{M-S-@key{RET}}. If you
3171 delete boxes or add/change them by hand, use this command to get things
3172 back into synch. Or simply toggle any checkbox twice with @kbd{C-c C-c}.
3175 @node Tags, Properties and columns, TODO items, Top
3178 @cindex headline tagging
3179 @cindex matching, tags
3180 @cindex sparse tree, tag based
3182 An excellent way to implement labels and contexts for cross-correlating
3183 information is to assign @i{tags} to headlines. Org-mode has extensive
3186 Every headline can contain a list of tags; they occur at the end of the
3187 headline. Tags are normal words containing letters, numbers, @samp{_},
3188 and @samp{@@}. Tags must be preceded and followed by a single colon,
3189 e.g., @samp{:WORK:}. Several tags can be specified, as in
3190 @samp{:work:URGENT:}.
3193 * Tag inheritance:: Tags use the tree structure of the outline
3194 * Setting tags:: How to assign tags to a headline
3195 * Tag searches:: Searching for combinations of tags
3198 @node Tag inheritance, Setting tags, Tags, Tags
3199 @section Tag inheritance
3200 @cindex tag inheritance
3201 @cindex inheritance, of tags
3202 @cindex sublevels, inclusion into tags match
3204 @i{Tags} make use of the hierarchical structure of outline trees. If a
3205 heading has a certain tag, all subheadings will inherit the tag as
3206 well. For example, in the list
3209 * Meeting with the French group :work:
3210 ** Summary by Frank :boss:notes:
3211 *** TODO Prepare slides for him :action:
3215 the final heading will have the tags @samp{:work:}, @samp{:boss:},
3216 @samp{:notes:}, and @samp{:action:} even though the final heading is not
3217 explicitly marked with those tags. When executing tag searches and
3218 Org-mode finds that a certain headline matches the search criterion, it
3219 will not check any sublevel headline, assuming that these also match and
3220 that the list of matches could become very long because of that. If you
3221 do want the subevels be tested and listed as well, you may set the
3222 variable @code{org-tags-match-list-sublevels}. To turn off tag
3223 inheritance entirely, use the variable @code{org-use-tag-inheritance}.
3225 @node Setting tags, Tag searches, Tag inheritance, Tags
3226 @section Setting tags
3227 @cindex setting tags
3228 @cindex tags, setting
3231 Tags can simply be typed into the buffer at the end of a headline.
3232 After a colon, @kbd{M-@key{TAB}} offers completion on tags. There is
3233 also a special command for inserting tags:
3238 @cindex completion, of tags
3239 Enter new tags for the current headline. Org-mode will either offer
3240 completion or a special single-key interface for setting tags, see
3241 below. After pressing @key{RET}, the tags will be inserted and aligned
3242 to @code{org-tags-column}. When called with a @kbd{C-u} prefix, all
3243 tags in the current buffer will be aligned to that column, just to make
3244 things look nice. TAGS are automatically realigned after promotion,
3245 demotion, and TODO state changes (@pxref{TODO basics}).
3248 Org will support tag insertion based on a @emph{list of tags}. By
3249 default this list is constructed dynamically, containing all tags
3250 currently used in the buffer. You may also globally specify a hard list
3251 of tags with the variable @code{org-tag-alist}. Finally you can set
3252 the default tags for a given file with lines like
3255 #+TAGS: @@work @@home @@tennisclub
3256 #+TAGS: laptop car pc sailboat
3259 If you have globally defined your preferred set of tags using the
3260 variable @code{org-tag-alist}, but would like to use a dynamic tag list
3261 in a specific file, add an empty TAGS option line to that file:
3267 The default support method for entering tags is minibuffer completion.
3268 However, Org-mode also implements a much better method: @emph{fast tag
3269 selection}. This method allows to select and deselect tags with a
3270 single key per tag. To function efficiently, you should assign unique
3271 keys to most tags. This can be done globally with
3274 (setq org-tag-alist '(("@@work" . ?w) ("@@home" . ?h) ("laptop" . ?l)))
3277 @noindent or on a per-file basis with
3280 #+TAGS: @@work(w) @@home(h) @@tennisclub(t) laptop(l) pc(p)
3284 You can also group together tags that are mutually exclusive. With
3285 curly braces@footnote{In @code{org-mode-alist} use
3286 @code{'(:startgroup)} and @code{'(:endgroup)}, respectively. Several
3287 groups are allowed.}
3290 #+TAGS: @{ @@work(w) @@home(h) @@tennisclub(t) @} laptop(l) pc(p)
3293 @noindent you indicate that at most one of @samp{@@work}, @samp{@@home},
3294 and @samp{@@tennisclub} should be selected.
3296 @noindent Don't forget to press @kbd{C-c C-c} with the cursor in one of
3297 these lines to activate any changes.
3299 If at least one tag has a selection key, pressing @kbd{C-c C-c} will
3300 automatically present you with a special interface, listing inherited
3301 tags, the tags of the current headline, and a list of all valid tags
3302 with corresponding keys@footnote{Keys will automatically be assigned to
3303 tags which have no configured keys.}. In this interface, you can use
3308 Pressing keys assigned to tags will add or remove them from the list of
3309 tags in the current line. Selecting a tag in a group of mutually
3310 exclusive tags will turn off any other tags from that group.
3313 Enter a tag in the minibuffer, even if the tag is not in the predefined
3314 list. You will be able to complete on all tags present in the buffer.
3317 Clear all tags for this line.
3320 Accept the modified set.
3322 Abort without installing changes.
3324 If @kbd{q} is not assigned to a tag, it aborts like @kbd{C-g}.
3326 Turn off groups of mutually exclusive tags. Use this to (as an
3327 exception) assign several tags from such a group.
3329 Toggle auto-exit after the next change (see below).
3330 If you are using expert mode, the first @kbd{C-c} will display the
3335 This method lets you assign tags to a headline with very few keys. With
3336 the above setup, you could clear the current tags and set @samp{@@home},
3337 @samp{laptop} and @samp{pc} tags with just the following keys: @kbd{C-c
3338 C-c @key{SPC} h l p @key{RET}}. Switching from @samp{@@home} to
3339 @samp{@@work} would be done with @kbd{C-c C-c w @key{RET}} or
3340 alternatively with @kbd{C-c C-c C-c w}. Adding the non-predefined tag
3341 @samp{Sarah} could be done with @kbd{C-c C-c @key{TAB} S a r a h
3342 @key{RET} @key{RET}}.
3344 If you find that most of the time, you need only a single keypress to
3345 modify your list of tags, set the variable
3346 @code{org-fast-tag-selection-single-key}. Then you no longer have to
3347 press @key{RET} to exit fast tag selection - it will immediately exit
3348 after the first change. If you then occasionally need more keys, press
3349 @kbd{C-c} to turn off auto-exit for the current tag selection process
3350 (in effect: start selection with @kbd{C-c C-c C-c} instead of @kbd{C-c
3351 C-c}). If you set the variable to the value @code{expert}, the special
3352 window is not even shown for single-key tag selection, it comes up only
3353 when you press an extra @kbd{C-c}.
3355 @node Tag searches, , Setting tags, Tags
3356 @section Tag searches
3357 @cindex tag searches
3358 @cindex searching for tags
3360 Once a system of tags has been set up, it can be used to collect related
3361 information into special lists.
3368 Create a sparse tree with all headlines matching a tags search. With a
3369 @kbd{C-u} prefix argument, ignore headlines that are not a TODO line.
3372 Create a global list of tag matches from all agenda files.
3373 @xref{Matching tags and properties}.
3376 Create a global list of tag matches from all agenda files, but check
3377 only TODO items and force checking subitems (see variable
3378 @code{org-tags-match-list-sublevels}).
3381 @cindex Boolean logic, for tag searches
3382 A @i{tags} search string can use Boolean operators @samp{&} for AND and
3383 @samp{|} for OR. @samp{&} binds more strongly than @samp{|}.
3384 Parenthesis are currently not implemented. A tag may also be preceded
3385 by @samp{-}, to select against it, and @samp{+} is syntactic sugar for
3386 positive selection. The AND operator @samp{&} is optional when @samp{+}
3387 or @samp{-} is present. Examples:
3391 Select headlines tagged @samp{:work:}, but discard those also tagged
3394 Selects lines tagged @samp{:work:} or @samp{:laptop:}.
3395 @item work|laptop&night
3396 Like before, but require the @samp{:laptop:} lines to be tagged also
3400 @cindex TODO keyword matching, with tags search
3401 If you are using multi-state TODO keywords (@pxref{TODO extensions}), it
3402 can be useful to also match on the TODO keyword. This can be done by
3403 adding a condition after a slash to a tags match. The syntax is similar
3404 to the tag matches, but should be applied with consideration: For
3405 example, a positive selection on several TODO keywords can not
3406 meaningfully be combined with boolean AND. However, @emph{negative
3407 selection} combined with AND can be meaningful. To make sure that only
3408 lines are checked that actually have any TODO keyword, use @kbd{C-c a
3409 M}, or equivalently start the todo part after the slash with @samp{!}.
3414 Select @samp{:work:}-tagged TODO lines with the specific TODO
3415 keyword @samp{WAITING}.
3416 @item work/!-WAITING-NEXT
3417 Select @samp{:work:}-tagged TODO lines that are neither @samp{WAITING}
3419 @item work/+WAITING|+NEXT
3420 Select @samp{:work:}-tagged TODO lines that are either @samp{WAITING} or
3424 @cindex regular expressions, with tags search
3425 Any element of the tag/todo match can be a regular expression - in this
3426 case it must be enclosed in curly braces. For example,
3427 @samp{work+@{^boss.*@}} matches headlines that contain the tag
3428 @samp{:work:} and any tag @i{starting} with @samp{boss}.
3430 @cindex level, require for tags/property match
3431 @cindex category, require for tags/property match
3432 You can also require a headline to be of a certain level or category, by
3433 writing instead of any TAG an expression like @samp{LEVEL=3} or
3434 @samp{CATEGORY="work"}, respectively. For example, a search
3435 @samp{+LEVEL=3+boss/-DONE} lists all level three headlines that have the
3436 tag @samp{boss} and are @emph{not} marked with the todo keyword DONE.
3438 @node Properties and columns, Dates and times, Tags, Top
3439 @chapter Properties and Columns
3442 Properties are a set of key-value pairs associated with an entry. There
3443 are two main applications for properties in Org-mode. First, properties
3444 are like tags, but with a value. Second, you can use properties to
3445 implement (very basic) database capabilities in an Org-mode buffer. For
3446 an example of the first application, imagine maintaining a file where
3447 you document bugs and plan releases of a piece of software. Instead of
3448 using tags like @code{:release_1:}, @code{:release_2:}, one can use a
3449 property, say @code{:Release:}, that in different subtrees has different
3450 values, such as @code{1.0} or @code{2.0}. For an example of the second
3451 application of properties, imagine keeping track of one's music CD's,
3452 where properties could be things such as the album artist, date of
3453 release, number of tracks, and so on.
3455 Properties can be conveniently edited and viewed in column view
3456 (@pxref{Column view}).
3458 Properties are like tags, but with a value. For example, in a file
3459 where you document bugs and plan releases of a piece of software,
3460 instead of using tags like @code{:release_1:}, @code{:release_2:}, it
3461 can be more efficient to use a property @code{:Release:} with a value
3462 @code{1.0} or @code{2.0}. Second, you can use properties to implement
3463 (very basic) database capabilities in an Org-mode buffer, for example to
3464 create a list of Music CD's you own. You can edit and view properties
3465 conveniently in column view (@pxref{Column view}).
3468 * Property syntax:: How properties are spelled out
3469 * Special properties:: Access to other Org-mode features
3470 * Property searches:: Matching property values
3471 * Property inheritance:: Passing values down the tree
3472 * Column view:: Tabular viewing and editing
3473 * Property API:: Properties for Lisp programmers
3476 @node Property syntax, Special properties, Properties and columns, Properties and columns
3477 @section Property Syntax
3478 @cindex property syntax
3479 @cindex drawer, for properties
3481 Properties are key-value pairs. They need to be inserted into a special
3482 drawer (@pxref{Drawers}) with the name @code{PROPERTIES}. Each property
3483 is specified on a single line, with the key (surrounded by colons)
3484 first, and the value after it. Here is an example:
3489 *** Goldberg Variations
3491 :Title: Goldberg Variations
3492 :Composer: J.S. Bach
3494 :Publisher: Deutsche Grammphon
3499 You may define the allowed values for a particular property @samp{:Xyz:}
3500 by setting a property @samp{:Xyz_ALL:}. This special property is
3501 @emph{inherited}, so if you set it in a level 1 entry, it will apply to
3502 the entire tree. When allowed values are defined, setting the
3503 corresponding property becomes easier and is less prone to typing
3504 errors. For the example with the CD collection, we can predefine
3505 publishers and the number of disks in a box like this:
3510 :NDisks_ALL: 1 2 3 4
3511 :Publisher_ALL: "Deutsche Grammophon" Phillips EMI
3515 If you want to set properties that can be inherited by any entry in a
3516 file, use a line like
3519 #+PROPERTY: NDisks_ALL 1 2 3 4
3522 Property values set with the global variable
3523 @code{org-global-properties} can be inherited by all entries in all
3527 The following commands help to work with properties:
3532 After an initial colon in a line, complete property keys. All keys used
3533 in the current file will be offered as possible completions.
3536 Set a property. This prompts for a property name and a value. If
3537 necessary, the property drawer is created as well.
3538 @item M-x org-insert-property-drawer
3539 Insert a property drawer into the current entry. The drawer will be
3540 inserted early in the entry, but after the lines with planning
3541 information like deadlines.
3544 With the cursor in a property drawer, this executes property commands.
3546 Set a property in the current entry. Both the property and the value
3547 can be inserted using completion.
3548 @kindex S-@key{right}
3549 @kindex S-@key{left}
3550 @item S-@key{left}/@key{right}
3551 Switch property at point to the next/previous allowed value.
3553 Remove a property from the current entry.
3555 Globally remove a property, from all entries in the current file.
3557 Compute the property at point, using the operator and scope from the
3558 nearest column format definition.
3561 @node Special properties, Property searches, Property syntax, Properties and columns
3562 @section Special Properties
3563 @cindex properties, special
3565 Special properties provide alternative access method to Org-mode
3566 features discussed in the previous chapters, like the TODO state or the
3567 priority of an entry. This interface exists so that you can include
3568 these states into columns view (@pxref{Column view}), or to use them in
3569 queries. The following property names are special and should not be
3570 used as keys in the properties drawer:
3573 TODO @r{The TODO keyword of the entry.}
3574 TAGS @r{The tags defined directly in the headline.}
3575 ALLTAGS @r{All tags, including inherited ones.}
3576 PRIORITY @r{The priority of the entry, a string with a single letter.}
3577 DEADLINE @r{The deadline time string, without the angular brackets.}
3578 SCHEDULED @r{The scheduling time stamp, without the angular brackets.}
3579 TIMESTAMP @r{The first keyword-less time stamp in the entry.}
3580 TIMESTAMP_IA @r{The first inactive time stamp in the entry.}
3581 CLOCKSUM @r{The sum of CLOCK intervals in the subtree. @code{org-clock-sum}}
3582 @r{must be run first to compute the values.}
3585 @node Property searches, Property inheritance, Special properties, Properties and columns
3586 @section Property searches
3587 @cindex properties, searching
3588 @cindex properties, inheritance
3589 @cindex searching, of properties
3590 @cindex inheritance, of properties
3592 To create sparse trees and special lists with selection based on
3593 properties, the same commands are used as for tag searches (@pxref{Tag
3594 searches}), and the same logic applies. For example, a search string
3597 +work-boss+PRIORITY="A"+Coffee="unlimited"+Effort=""+With=@{Sarah\|Denny@}
3601 finds entries tagged @samp{:work:} but not @samp{:boss:}, which
3602 also have a priority value @samp{A}, a @samp{:Coffee:} property with the
3603 value @samp{unlimited}, an @samp{Effort} property that is undefined or
3604 empty, and a @samp{:With:} property that is matched by
3605 the regular expression @samp{Sarah\|Denny}.
3607 You can configure Org-mode to use property inheritance during a search,
3608 see @ref{Property inheritance} for details.
3610 There is also a special command for creating sparse trees based on a
3616 Create a sparse tree based on the value of a property. This first
3617 prompts for the name of a property, and then for a value. A sparse tree
3618 is created with all entries that define this property with the given
3619 value. If you enclose the value into curly braces, it is interpreted as
3620 a regular expression and matched against the property values.
3623 @node Property inheritance, Column view, Property searches, Properties and columns
3624 @section Property Inheritance
3626 The outline structure of Org-mode documents lends itself for an
3627 inheritance model of properties: If the parent in a tree has a certain
3628 property, the children can inherit this property. Org-mode does not
3629 turn this on by default, because it can slow down property searches
3630 significantly and is often not needed. However, if you find inheritance
3631 useful, you can turn it on by setting the variable
3632 @code{org-use-property-inheritance}. It may be set to @code{t}, to make
3633 all properties inherited from the parent, or to a list of properties
3634 that should be inherited.
3636 Org-mode has a few properties for which inheritance is hard-coded, at
3637 least for the special applications for which they are used:
3641 The @code{:COLUMNS:} property defines the format of column view
3642 (@pxref{Column view}). It is inherited in the sense that the level
3643 where a @code{:COLUMNS:} property is defined is used as the starting
3644 point for a column view table, independently of the location in the
3645 subtree from where columns view is turned on.
3647 For agenda view, a category set through a @code{:CATEGORY:} property
3648 applies to the entire subtree.
3650 For archiving, the @code{:ARCHIVE:} property may define the archive
3651 location for the entire subtree (@pxref{Moving subtrees}).
3654 @node Column view, Property API, Property inheritance, Properties and columns
3655 @section Column View
3657 A great way to view and edit properties in an outline tree is
3658 @emph{column view}. In column view, each outline item is turned into a
3659 table row. Columns in this table provide access to properties of the
3660 entries. Org-mode implements columns by overlaying a tabular structure
3661 over the headline of each item. While the headlines have been turned
3662 into a table row, you can still change the visibility of the outline
3663 tree. For example, you get a compact table by switching to CONTENTS
3664 view (@kbd{S-@key{TAB} S-@key{TAB}}, or simply @kbd{c} while column view
3665 is active), but you can still open, read, and edit the entry below each
3666 headline. Or, you can switch to column view after executing a sparse
3667 tree command and in this way get a table only for the selected items.
3668 Column view also works in agenda buffers (@pxref{Agenda views}) where
3669 queries have collected selected items, possibly from a number of files.
3672 * Defining columns:: The COLUMNS format property
3673 * Using column view:: How to create and use column view
3674 * Capturing Column View:: A dynamic block for column view
3677 @node Defining columns, Using column view, Column view, Column view
3678 @subsection Defining Columns
3679 @cindex column view, for properties
3680 @cindex properties, column view
3682 Setting up a column view first requires defining the columns. This is
3683 done by defining a column format line.
3686 * Scope of column definitions:: Where defined, where valid?
3687 * Column attributes:: Appearance and content of a column
3690 @node Scope of column definitions, Column attributes, Defining columns, Defining columns
3691 @subsubsection Scope of column definitions
3693 To define a column format for an entire file, use a line like
3696 #+COLUMNS: %25ITEM %TAGS %PRIORITY %TODO
3699 To specify a format that only applies to a specific tree, add a
3700 @code{:COLUMNS:} property to the top node of that tree, for example:
3703 ** Top node for columns view
3705 :COLUMNS: %25ITEM %TAGS %PRIORITY %TODO
3709 If a @code{:COLUMNS:} property is present in an entry, it defines columns
3710 for the entry itself, and for the entire subtree below it. Since the
3711 column definition is part of the hierarchical structure of the document,
3712 you can define columns on level 1 that are general enough for all
3713 sublevels, and more specific columns further down, when you edit a
3714 deeper part of the tree.
3716 @node Column attributes, , Scope of column definitions, Defining columns
3717 @subsubsection Column attributes
3718 A column definition sets the attributes of a column. The general
3719 definition looks like this:
3722 %[width]property[(title)][@{summary-type@}]
3726 Except for the percent sign and the property name, all items are
3727 optional. The individual parts have the following meaning:
3730 width @r{An integer specifying the width of the column in characters.}
3731 @r{If omitted, the width will be determined automatically.}
3732 property @r{The property that should be edited in this column.}
3733 (title) @r{The header text for the column. If omitted, the}
3734 @r{property name is used.}
3735 @{summary-type@} @r{The summary type. If specified, the column values for}
3736 @r{parent nodes are computed from the children.}
3737 @r{Supported summary types are:}
3738 @{+@} @r{Sum numbers in this column.}
3739 @{+;%.1f@} @r{Like @samp{+}, but format result with @samp{%.1f}.}
3740 @{$@} @r{Currency, short for @samp{+;%.2f}.}
3741 @{:@} @r{Sum times, HH:MM:SS, plain numbers are hours.}
3742 @{X@} @r{Checkbox status, [X] if all children are [X].}
3743 @{X/@} @r{Checkbox status, [n/m].}
3744 @{X%@} @r{Checkbox status, [n%].}
3748 Here is an example for a complete columns definition, along with allowed
3752 :COLUMNS: %20ITEM %9Approved(Approved?)@{X@} %Owner %11Status \@footnote{Please note that the COLUMNS definition must be on a single line - it is wrapped here only because of formatting constraints.}
3753 %10Time_Estimate@{:@} %CLOCKSUM
3754 :Owner_ALL: Tammy Mark Karl Lisa Don
3755 :Status_ALL: "In progress" "Not started yet" "Finished" ""
3756 :Approved_ALL: "[ ]" "[X]"
3759 The first column, @samp{%25ITEM}, means the first 25 characters of the
3760 item itself, i.e. of the headline. You probably always should start the
3761 column definition with the ITEM specifier. The other specifiers create
3762 columns @samp{Owner} with a list of names as allowed values, for
3763 @samp{Status} with four different possible values, and for a checkbox
3764 field @samp{Approved}. When no width is given after the @samp{%}
3765 character, the column will be exactly as wide as it needs to be in order
3766 to fully display all values. The @samp{Approved} column does have a
3767 modified title (@samp{Approved?}, with a question mark). Summaries will
3768 be created for the @samp{Time_Estimate} column by adding time duration
3769 expressions like HH:MM, and for the @samp{Approved} column, by providing
3770 an @samp{[X]} status if all children have been checked. The
3771 @samp{CLOCKSUM} column is special, it lists the sum of CLOCK intervals
3774 @node Using column view, Capturing Column View, Defining columns, Column view
3775 @subsection Using Column View
3778 @tsubheading{Turning column view on and off}
3781 Create the column view for the local environment. This command searches
3782 the hierarchy, up from point, for a @code{:COLUMNS:} property that defines
3783 a format. When one is found, the column view table is established for
3784 the entire tree, starting from the entry that contains the @code{:COLUMNS:}
3785 property. If none is found, the format is taken from the @code{#+COLUMNS}
3786 line or from the variable @code{org-columns-default-format}, and column
3787 view is established for the current entry and its subtree.
3790 Recreate the column view, to included hanges happening in the buffer.
3797 @tsubheading{Editing values}
3798 @item @key{left} @key{right} @key{up} @key{down}
3799 Move through the column view from field to field.
3800 @kindex S-@key{left}
3801 @kindex S-@key{right}
3802 @item S-@key{left}/@key{right}
3803 Switch to the next/previous allowed value of the field. For this, you
3804 have to have specified allowed values for a property.
3808 Same as @kbd{S-@key{left}/@key{right}}
3811 Edit the property at point. For the special properties, this will
3812 invoke the same interface that you normally use to change that
3813 property. For example, when editing a TAGS property, the tag completion
3814 or fast selection interface will pop up.
3817 When there is a checkbox at point, toggle it.
3820 View the full value of this property. This is useful if the width of
3821 the column is smaller than that of the value.
3824 Edit the list of allowed values for this property. If the list is found
3825 in the hierarchy, the modified values is stored there. If no list is
3826 found, the new value is stored in the first entry that is part of the
3827 current column view.
3828 @tsubheading{Modifying the table structure}
3832 Make the column narrower/wider by one character.
3833 @kindex S-M-@key{right}
3834 @item S-M-@key{right}
3835 Insert a new column, to the right of the current column.
3836 @kindex S-M-@key{left}
3837 @item S-M-@key{left}
3838 Delete the current column.
3841 @node Capturing Column View, , Using column view, Column view
3842 @subsection Capturing Column View
3844 Since column view is just an overlay over a buffer, it cannot be
3845 exported or printed directly. If you want to capture a column view, use
3846 the dynamic block (@pxref{Dynamic blocks}). The frame of this block
3851 #+BEGIN: columnview :hlines 1 :id "label"
3856 @noindent This dynamic block has the following parameters:
3860 This is most important parameter. Column view is a feature that is
3861 often localized to a certain (sub)tree, and the capture block might be
3862 in a different location in the file. To identify the tree whose view to
3863 capture, you can use 3 values:
3865 local @r{use the tree in which the capture block is located}
3866 global @r{make a global view, including all headings in the file}
3867 "label" @r{call column view in the tree that has and @code{:ID:}}
3868 @r{property with the value @i{label}}
3871 When @code{t}, insert a hline after every line. When a number N, insert
3872 a hline before each headline with level @code{<= N}.
3874 When set to @code{t}, enforce column groups to get vertical lines.
3878 The following commands insert or update the dynamic block:
3883 Insert a dynamic block capturing a column view. You will be prompted
3884 for the scope or id of the view.
3889 Update dynamical block at point. The cursor needs to be in the
3890 @code{#+BEGIN} line of the dynamic block.
3891 @kindex C-u C-c C-x C-u
3892 @item C-u C-c C-x C-u
3893 Update all dynamic blocks (@pxref{Dynamic blocks}). This is useful if
3894 you have several clocktable blocks in a buffer.
3897 @node Property API, , Column view, Properties and columns
3898 @section The Property API
3899 @cindex properties, API
3900 @cindex API, for properties
3902 There is a full API for accessing and changing properties. This API can
3903 be used by Emacs Lisp programs to work with properties and to implement
3904 features based on them. For more information see @ref{Using the
3907 @node Dates and times, Remember, Properties and columns, Top
3908 @chapter Dates and Times
3914 To assist project planning, TODO items can be labeled with a date and/or
3915 a time. The specially formatted string carrying the date and time
3916 information is called a @emph{timestamp} in Org-mode. This may be a
3917 little confusing because timestamp is often used as indicating when
3918 something was created or last changed. However, in Org-mode this term
3919 is used in a much wider sense.
3922 * Time stamps:: Assigning a time to a tree entry
3923 * Creating timestamps:: Commands which insert timestamps
3924 * Deadlines and scheduling:: Planning your work
3925 * Clocking work time::
3929 @node Time stamps, Creating timestamps, Dates and times, Dates and times
3930 @section Time stamps, deadlines and scheduling
3932 @cindex ranges, time
3937 A time stamp is a specification of a date (possibly with time or a range
3938 of times) in a special format, either @samp{<2003-09-16 Tue>} or
3939 @samp{<2003-09-16 Tue 09:39>} or @samp{<2003-09-16 Tue
3940 12:00-12:30>}@footnote{This is the standard ISO date/time format. To
3941 use an alternative format, see @ref{Custom time format}.}. A time stamp
3942 can appear anywhere in the headline or body of an org-tree entry. Its
3943 presence causes entries to be shown on specific dates in the agenda
3944 (@pxref{Weekly/Daily agenda}). We distinguish:
3947 @item Plain time stamp; Event; Appointment
3949 A simple time stamp just assigns a date/time to an item. This is just
3950 like writing down an appointment or event in a paper agenda. In the
3951 timeline and agenda displays, the headline of an entry associated with a
3952 plain time stamp will be shown exactly on that date.
3955 * Meet Peter at the movies <2006-11-01 Wed 19:15>
3956 * Discussion on climate change <2006-11-02 Thu 20:00-22:00>
3959 @item Time stamp with repeater interval
3960 @cindex timestamp, with repeater interval
3961 A time stamp may contain a @emph{repeater interval}, indicating that it
3962 applies not only on the given date, but again and again after a certain
3963 interval of N days (d), weeks (w), months(m), or years(y). The
3964 following will show up in the agenda every Wednesday:
3967 * Pick up Sam at school <2007-05-16 Wed 12:30 +1w>
3970 @item Diary-style sexp entries
3971 For more complex date specifications, Org-mode supports using the
3972 special sexp diary entries implemented in the Emacs calendar/diary
3973 package. For example
3976 * The nerd meeting on every 2nd Thursday of the month
3977 <%%(diary-float t 4 2)>
3980 @item Time/Date range
3983 Two time stamps connected by @samp{--} denote a range. The headline
3984 will be shown on the first and last day of the range, and on any dates
3985 that are displayed and fall in the range. Here is an example:
3988 ** Meeting in Amsterdam
3989 <2004-08-23 Mon>--<2004-08-26 Thu>
3992 @item Inactive time stamp
3993 @cindex timestamp, inactive
3994 @cindex inactive timestamp
3995 Just like a plain time stamp, but with square brackets instead of
3996 angular ones. These time stamps are inactive in the sense that they do
3997 @emph{not} trigger an entry to show up in the agenda.
4000 * Gillian comes late for the fifth time [2006-11-01 Wed]
4005 @node Creating timestamps, Deadlines and scheduling, Time stamps, Dates and times
4006 @section Creating timestamps
4007 @cindex creating timestamps
4008 @cindex timestamps, creating
4010 For Org-mode to recognize time stamps, they need to be in the specific
4011 format. All commands listed below produce time stamps in the correct
4017 Prompt for a date and insert a corresponding time stamp. When the
4018 cursor is at a previously used time stamp, it is updated to NOW. When
4019 this command is used twice in succession, a time range is inserted.
4023 Like @kbd{C-c .}, but use the alternative format which contains date
4024 and time. The default time can be rounded to multiples of 5 minutes,
4025 see the option @code{org-time-stamp-rounding-minutes}.
4029 Like @kbd{C-c .}, but insert an inactive time stamp that will not cause
4034 Insert a time stamp corresponding to the cursor date in the Calendar.
4038 Access the Emacs calendar for the current date. If there is a
4039 timestamp in the current line, goto the corresponding date
4044 Access the agenda for the date given by the time stamp or -range at
4045 point (@pxref{Weekly/Daily agenda}).
4047 @kindex S-@key{left}
4048 @kindex S-@key{right}
4050 @itemx S-@key{right}
4051 Change date at cursor by one day. These key bindings conflict with
4052 CUA-mode (@pxref{Conflicts}).
4055 @kindex S-@key{down}
4058 Change the item under the cursor in a timestamp. The cursor can be on a
4059 year, month, day, hour or minute. Note that if the cursor is in a
4060 headline and not at a time stamp, these same keys modify the priority of
4061 an item. (@pxref{Priorities}). The key bindings also conflict with
4062 CUA-mode (@pxref{Conflicts}).
4065 @cindex evaluate time range
4067 Evaluate a time range by computing the difference between start and
4068 end. With prefix arg, insert result after the time range (in a table:
4069 into the following column).
4074 * The date/time prompt:: How org-mode helps you entering date and time
4075 * Custom time format:: Making dates look differently
4078 @node The date/time prompt, Custom time format, Creating timestamps, Creating timestamps
4079 @subsection The date/time prompt
4080 @cindex date, reading in minibuffer
4081 @cindex time, reading in minibuffer
4083 When Org-mode prompts for a date/time, the default is shown as an ISO
4084 date, and the prompt therefore seems to ask for an ISO date. But it
4085 will in fact accept any string containing some date and/or time
4086 information, and it is really smart about interpreting your input. You
4087 can, for example, use @kbd{C-y} to paste a (possibly multi-line) string
4088 copied from an email message. Org-mode will find whatever information
4089 is in there and derive anything you have not specified from the
4090 @emph{default date and time}. The default is usually the current date
4091 and time, but when modifying an existing time stamp, or when entering
4092 the second stamp of a range, it is taken from the stamp in the buffer.
4093 When filling in information, Org-mode assumes that most of the time you
4094 will want to enter a date in the future: If you omit the month/year and
4095 the given day/month is @i{before} today, it will assume that you mean a
4096 future date@footnote{See the variable
4097 @code{org-read-date-prefer-future}.}.
4099 For example, lets assume that today is @b{June 13, 2006}. Here is how
4100 various inputs will be interpreted, the items filled in by Org-mode are
4104 3-2-5 --> 2003-02-05
4105 14 --> @b{2006}-@b{06}-14
4106 12 --> @b{2006}-@b{07}-12
4107 Fri --> nearest Friday (defaultdate or later)
4108 sep 15 --> @b{2006}-11-15
4109 feb 15 --> @b{2007}-02-15
4110 sep 12 9 --> 2009-09-12
4111 12:45 --> @b{2006}-@b{06}-@b{13} 12:45
4112 22 sept 0:34 --> @b{2006}-09-22 0:34
4115 Furthermore you can specify a relative date by giving, as the
4116 @emph{first} thing in the input: a plus/minus sign, a number and a
4117 letter [dwmy] to indicate change in days weeks, months, years. With a
4118 single plus or minus, the date is always relative to today. With a
4119 double plus or minus, it is relative to the default date. If instead of
4120 a single letter, you use the abbreviation of day name, the date will be
4121 the nth such day. E.g.
4124 +4d --> four days from today
4125 +4 --> same as above
4126 +2w --> two weeks from today
4127 ++5 --> five days from default date
4128 +2tue --> second tuesday from now.
4131 The function understands English month and weekday abbreviations. If
4132 you want to use unabbreviated names and/or other languages, configure
4133 the variables @code{parse-time-months} and @code{parse-time-weekdays}.
4135 @cindex calendar, for selecting date
4136 Parallel to the minibuffer prompt, a calendar is popped up@footnote{If
4137 you don't need/want the calendar, configure the variable
4138 @code{org-popup-calendar-for-date-prompt}.}. When you exit the date
4139 prompt, either by clicking on a date in the calendar, or by pressing
4140 @key{RET}, the date selected in the calendar will be combined with the
4141 information entered at the prompt. You can control the calendar fully
4142 from the minibuffer:
4147 @kindex S-@key{right}
4148 @kindex S-@key{left}
4149 @kindex S-@key{down}
4151 @kindex M-S-@key{right}
4152 @kindex M-S-@key{left}
4155 > / < @r{Scroll calendar forward/backward by one month.}
4156 mouse-1 @r{Select date by clicking on it.}
4157 S-@key{right}/@key{left} @r{One day forward/backward.}
4158 S-@key{down}/@key{up} @r{One week forward/backward.}
4159 M-S-@key{right}/@key{left} @r{One month forward/backward.}
4160 @key{RET} @r{Choose date in calendar.}
4163 The actions of the date/time prompt may seem complex, but I asure you
4164 they will grow on you. To help you understand what is going on, the
4165 current interpretation of your input will be displayed live in the
4166 minibuffer@footnote{If you find this distracting, turn the display of
4167 with @code{org-read-date-display-live}.}.
4169 @node Custom time format, , The date/time prompt, Creating timestamps
4170 @subsection Custom time format
4171 @cindex custom date/time format
4172 @cindex time format, custom
4173 @cindex date format, custom
4175 Org-mode uses the standard ISO notation for dates and times as it is
4176 defined in ISO 8601. If you cannot get used to this and require another
4177 representation of date and time to keep you happy, you can get it by
4178 customizing the variables @code{org-display-custom-times} and
4179 @code{org-time-stamp-custom-formats}.
4184 Toggle the display of custom formats for dates and times.
4188 Org-mode needs the default format for scanning, so the custom date/time
4189 format does not @emph{replace} the default format - instead it is put
4190 @emph{over} the default format using text properties. This has the
4191 following consequences:
4194 You cannot place the cursor onto a time stamp anymore, only before or
4197 The @kbd{S-@key{up}/@key{down}} keys can no longer be used to adjust
4198 each component of a time stamp. If the cursor is at the beginning of
4199 the stamp, @kbd{S-@key{up}/@key{down}} will change the stamp by one day,
4200 just like @kbd{S-@key{left}/@key{right}}. At the end of the stamp, the
4201 time will be changed by one minute.
4203 If the time stamp contains a range of clock times or a repeater, these
4204 will not be overlayed, but remain in the buffer as they were.
4206 When you delete a time stamp character-by-character, it will only
4207 disappear from the buffer after @emph{all} (invisible) characters
4208 belonging to the ISO timestamp have been removed.
4210 If the custom time stamp format is longer than the default and you are
4211 using dates in tables, table alignment will be messed up. If the custom
4212 format is shorter, things do work as expected.
4216 @node Deadlines and scheduling, Clocking work time, Creating timestamps, Dates and times
4217 @section Deadlines and Scheduling
4219 A time stamp may be preceded by special keywords to facilitate planning:
4223 @cindex DEADLINE keyword
4225 Meaning: the task (most likely a TODO item, though not necessarily) is supposed
4226 to be finished on that date.
4228 On the deadline date, the task will be listed in the agenda. In
4229 addition, the agenda for @emph{today} will carry a warning about the
4230 approaching or missed deadline, starting
4231 @code{org-deadline-warning-days} before the due date, and continuing
4232 until the entry is marked DONE. An example:
4235 *** TODO write article about the Earth for the Guide
4236 The editor in charge is [[bbdb:Ford Prefect]]
4237 DEADLINE: <2004-02-29 Sun>
4240 You can specify a different lead time for warnings for a specific
4241 deadlines using the following syntax. Here is an example with a warning
4242 period of 5 days @code{DEADLINE: <2004-02-29 Sun -5d>}.
4245 @cindex SCHEDULED keyword
4247 Meaning: you are planning to start working on that task on the given
4250 The headline will be listed under the given date@footnote{It will still
4251 be listed on that date after it has been marked DONE. If you don't like
4252 this, set the variable @code{org-agenda-skip-scheduled-if-done}.}. In
4253 addition, a reminder that the scheduled date has passed will be present
4254 in the compilation for @emph{today}, until the entry is marked DONE.
4255 I.e., the task will automatically be forwarded until completed.
4258 *** TODO Call Trillian for a date on New Years Eve.
4259 SCHEDULED: <2004-12-25 Sat>
4263 @b{Important:} Scheduling an item in Org-mode should @i{not} be
4264 understood in the same way that we understand @i{scheduling a meeting}.
4265 Setting a date for a meeting is just a simple appointment, you should
4266 mark this entry with a simple plain time stamp, to get this item shown
4267 on the date where it applies. This is a frequent mis-understanding from
4268 Org-users. In Org-mode, @i{scheduling} means setting a date when you
4269 want to start working on an action item.
4272 You may use time stamps with repeaters in scheduling and deadline
4273 entries. Org-mode will issue early and late warnings based on the
4274 assumption that the time stamp represents the @i{nearest instance} of
4275 the repeater. However, the use of diary sexp entries like
4277 @code{<%%(diary-float t 42)>}
4279 in scheduling and deadline timestamps is limited. Org-mode does not
4280 know enough about the internals of each sexp function to issue early and
4281 late warnings. However, it will show the item on each day where the
4285 * Inserting deadline/schedule:: Planning items
4286 * Repeated tasks:: Items that show up again and again
4289 @node Inserting deadline/schedule, Repeated tasks, Deadlines and scheduling, Deadlines and scheduling
4290 @subsection Inserting deadline/schedule
4292 The following commands allow to quickly insert a deadline or to schedule
4299 Insert @samp{DEADLINE} keyword along with a stamp. The insertion will
4300 happen in the line directly following the headline. When called with a
4301 prefix arg, an existing deadline will be removed from the entry.
4302 @c FIXME Any CLOSED timestamp will be removed.????????
4305 @cindex sparse tree, for deadlines
4307 Create a sparse tree with all deadlines that are either past-due, or
4308 which will become due within @code{org-deadline-warning-days}.
4309 With @kbd{C-u} prefix, show all deadlines in the file. With a numeric
4310 prefix, check that many days. For example, @kbd{C-1 C-c / d} shows
4311 all deadlines due tomorrow.
4315 Insert @samp{SCHEDULED} keyword along with a stamp. The insertion will
4316 happen in the line directly following the headline. Any CLOSED
4317 timestamp will be removed. When called with a prefix argument, remove
4318 the scheduling date from the entry.
4321 @node Repeated tasks, , Inserting deadline/schedule, Deadlines and scheduling
4322 @subsection Repeated Tasks
4324 Some tasks need to be repeated again and again. Org-mode helps to
4325 organize such tasks using a so-called repeater in a DEADLINE, SCHEDULED,
4326 or plain time stamp. In the following example
4328 ** TODO Pay the rent
4329 DEADLINE: <2005-10-01 Sat +1m>
4331 the @code{+1m} is a repeater; the intended interpretation is that the
4332 task has a deadline on <2005-10-01> and repeats itself every (one) month
4333 starting from that time.
4335 Deadlines and scheduled items produce entries in the agenda when they
4336 are over-due, so it is important to be able to mark such an entry as
4337 completed once you have done so. When you mark a DEADLINE or a SCHEDULE
4338 with the todo keyword DONE, it will no longer produce entries in the
4339 agenda. The problem with this is, however, that then also the
4340 @emph{next} instance of the repeated entry will not be active. Org-mode
4341 deals with this in the following way: When you try to mark such an entry
4342 DONE (using @kbd{C-c C-t}), it will shift the base date of the repeating
4343 time stamp by the repeater interval, and immediately set the entry state
4344 back to TODO. In the example above, setting the state to DONE would
4345 actually switch the date like this:
4348 ** TODO Pay the rent
4349 DEADLINE: <2005-11-01 Tue +1m>
4352 You will also be prompted for a note@footnote{You can change this using
4353 the option @code{org-log-repeat}, or the @code{#+STARTUP} options
4354 @code{logrepeat}, @code{lognoterepeat}, and @code{nologrepeat}.} that
4355 will be put under the DEADLINE line to keep a record that you actually
4356 acted on the previous instance of this deadline.
4358 As a consequence of shifting the base date, this entry will no longer be
4359 visible in the agenda when checking past dates, but all future instances
4362 You may have both scheduling and deadline information for a specific
4363 task - just make sure that the repeater intervals on both are the same.
4365 @node Clocking work time, , Deadlines and scheduling, Dates and times
4366 @section Clocking work time
4368 Org-mode allows you to clock the time you spent on specific tasks in a
4369 project. When you start working on an item, you can start the clock.
4370 When you stop working on that task, or when you mark the task done, the
4371 clock is stopped and the corresponding time interval is recorded. It
4372 also computes the total time spent on each subtree of a project.
4377 Start the clock on the current item (clock-in). This inserts the CLOCK
4378 keyword together with a timestamp. If this is not the first clocking of
4379 this item, the multiple CLOCK lines will be wrapped into a
4380 @code{:CLOCK:} drawer (see also the variable
4381 @code{org-clock-into-drawer}).
4384 Stop the clock (clock-out). The inserts another timestamp at the same
4385 location where the clock was last started. It also directly computes
4386 the resulting time in inserts it after the time range as @samp{=>
4387 HH:MM}. See the variable @code{org-log-note-clock-out} for the
4388 possibility to record an additional note together with the clock-out
4389 time stamp@footnote{The corresponding in-buffer setting is:
4390 @code{#+STARTUP: lognoteclock-out}}.
4393 Recompute the time interval after changing one of the time stamps. This
4394 is only necessary if you edit the time stamps directly. If you change
4395 them with @kbd{S-@key{cursor}} keys, the update is automatic.
4398 Changing the TODO state of an item to DONE automatically stops the clock
4399 if it is running in this same item.
4402 Cancel the current clock. This is useful if a clock was started by
4403 mistake, or if you ended up working on something else.
4406 Jump to the entry that contains the currently running clock, an another
4410 Display time summaries for each subtree in the current buffer. This
4411 puts overlays at the end of each headline, showing the total time
4412 recorded under that heading, including the time of any subheadings. You
4413 can use visibility cycling to study the tree, but the overlays disappear
4414 when you change the buffer (see variable
4415 @code{org-remove-highlights-with-change}) or press @kbd{C-c C-c}.
4418 Insert a dynamic block (@pxref{Dynamic blocks}) containing a clock
4419 report as an org-mode table into the current file. When the cursor is
4420 at an existing clock table, just update it. When called with a prefix
4421 argument, jump to the first clock report in the current document and
4424 #+BEGIN: clocktable :maxlevel 2 :emphasize nil :scope file
4429 If such a block already exists at point, its content is replaced by the
4430 new table. The @samp{BEGIN} line can specify options:
4432 :maxlevel @r{Maximum level depth to which times are listed in the table.}
4433 :emphasize @r{When @code{t}, emphasize level one and level two items}
4434 :scope @r{The scope to consider. This can be any of the following:}
4435 nil @r{the current buffer or narrowed region}
4436 file @r{the full current buffer}
4437 subtree @r{the subtree where the clocktable is located}
4438 treeN @r{the surrounding level N tree, for example @code{tree3}}
4439 tree @r{the surrounding level 1 tree}
4440 agenda @r{all agenda files}
4441 ("file"..) @r{scan these files}
4442 :block @r{The time block to consider. This block is specified relative}
4443 @r{to the current time and may be any of these keywords:}
4444 @r{@code{today}, @code{yesterday}, @code{thisweek}, @code{lastweek},}
4445 @r{@code{thismonth}, @code{lastmonth}, @code{thisyear}, or @code{lastyear}}.
4446 :tstart @r{A time string specifying when to start considering times}
4447 :tend @r{A time string specifying when to stop considering times}
4448 :step @r{@code{week} or @code{day}, to split the table into chunks}
4450 So to get a clock summary of the current level 1 tree, for the current
4451 day, you could write
4453 #+BEGIN: clocktable :maxlevel 2 :block today :scope tree1
4457 and to use a specific time range you could write@footnote{Note that all
4458 parameters must be specified in a single line - the line is broken here
4459 only to fit it onto the manual.}
4461 #+BEGIN: clocktable :tstart "<2006-08-10 Thu 10:00>"
4462 :tend "<2006-08-10 Thu 12:00>"
4470 Update dynamical block at point. The cursor needs to be in the
4471 @code{#+BEGIN} line of the dynamic block.
4472 @kindex C-u C-c C-x C-u
4473 @item C-u C-c C-x C-u
4474 Update all dynamic blocks (@pxref{Dynamic blocks}). This is useful if
4475 you have several clocktable blocks in a buffer.
4478 The @kbd{l} key may be used in the timeline (@pxref{Timeline}) and in
4479 the agenda (@pxref{Weekly/Daily agenda}) to show which tasks have been
4480 worked on or closed during a day.
4482 @node Remember, Agenda views, Dates and times, Top
4484 @cindex @file{remember.el}
4486 The @i{Remember} package by John Wiegley lets you store quick notes with
4487 little interruption of your work flow. See
4488 @uref{http://www.emacswiki.org/cgi-bin/wiki/RememberMode} for more
4489 information. It is an excellent way to add new notes and tasks to
4490 Org-mode files. Org-mode significantly expands the possibilities of
4491 @i{remember}: You may define templates for different note types, and
4492 associate target files and headlines with specific templates. It also
4493 allows you to select the location where a note should be stored
4494 interactively, on the fly.
4497 * Setting up remember:: Some code for .emacs to get things going
4498 * Remember templates:: Define the outline of different note types
4499 * Storing notes:: Directly get the note to where it belongs
4500 * Refiling notes:: Moving a note or task to a project
4503 @node Setting up remember, Remember templates, Remember, Remember
4504 @section Setting up remember
4506 The following customization will tell @i{remember} to use org files as
4507 target, and to create annotations compatible with Org-mode links.
4510 (org-remember-insinuate)
4511 (setq org-directory "~/path/to/my/orgfiles/")
4512 (setq org-default-notes-file (concat org-directory "/notes.org"))
4513 (define-key global-map "\C-cr" 'org-remember)
4516 The last line binds the command @code{org-remember} to a global
4517 key@footnote{Please select your own key, @kbd{C-c r} is only a
4518 suggestion.}. @code{org-remember} basically just calls @code{remember},
4519 but it makes a few things easier: If there is an active region, it will
4520 automatically copy the region into the remember buffer. It also allows
4521 to jump to the buffer and location where remember notes are being
4522 stored: Just call @code{org-remember} with a prefix argument. If you
4523 use two prefix arguments, Org-mode jumps to the location where the last
4524 remember note was stored.
4526 @node Remember templates, Storing notes, Setting up remember, Remember
4527 @section Remember templates
4528 @cindex templates, for remember
4530 In combination with Org-mode, you can use templates to generate
4531 different types of @i{remember} notes. For example, if you would like
4532 to use one template to create general TODO entries, another one for
4533 journal entries, and a third one for collecting random ideas, you could
4537 (setq org-remember-templates
4538 '(("Todo" ?t "* TODO %?\n %i\n %a" "~/org/TODO.org" "Tasks")
4539 ("Journal" ?j "* %U %?\n\n %i\n %a" "~/org/JOURNAL.org")
4540 ("Idea" ?i "* %^@{Title@}\n %i\n %a" "~/org/JOURNAL.org" "New Ideas")))
4543 @noindent In these entries, the first string is just a name, and the
4544 character specifies how to select the template. It is useful if the
4545 character is also the first letter of the name. The next string
4546 specifies the template. Two more (optional) strings give the file in
4547 which, and the headline under which the new note should be stored. The
4548 file (if not present or @code{nil}) defaults to
4549 @code{org-default-notes-file}, the heading to
4550 @code{org-remember-default-headline}.
4552 When you call @kbd{M-x remember} (or @kbd{M-x org-remember}) to remember
4553 something, org will prompt for a key to select the template (if you have
4554 more than one template) and then prepare the buffer like
4557 [[file:link to where you called remember]]
4561 During expansion of the template, special @kbd{%}-escapes allow dynamic
4562 insertion of content:
4564 %^@{prompt@} @r{prompt the user for a string and replace this sequence with it.}
4565 @r{You may specify a default value and a completion table with}
4566 @r{%^@{prompt|default|completion2|completion3...@}}
4567 @r{The arrow keys access a prompt-specific history.}
4568 %t @r{time stamp, date only}
4569 %T @r{time stamp with date and time}
4570 %u, %U @r{like the above, but inactive time stamps}
4571 %^t @r{like @code{%t}, but prompt for date. Similarly @code{%^T}, @code{%^u}, @code{%^U}}
4572 @r{You may define a prompt like @code{%^@{Birthday@}t}}
4573 %n @r{user name (taken from @code{user-full-name})}
4574 %a @r{annotation, normally the link created with @code{org-store-link}}
4575 %A @r{like @code{%a}, but prompt for the description part}
4576 %i @r{initial content, the region when remember is called with C-u.}
4577 @r{The entire text will be indented like @code{%i} itself.}
4578 %c @r{Content of the clipboard, or current kill ring head.}
4579 %^g @r{prompt for tags, with completion on tags in target file.}
4580 %^G @r{prompt for tags, with completion all tags in all agenda files.}
4581 %:keyword @r{specific information for certain link types, see below}
4582 %[pathname] @r{insert the contents of the file given by @code{pathname}}
4583 %(sexp) @r{evaluate elisp @code{(sexp)} and replace with the result}
4584 %! @r{immediately store note after completing the template}
4585 @r{(skipping the @kbd{C-c C-c} that normally triggers storing)}
4589 For specific link types, the following keywords will be
4590 defined@footnote{If you define your own link types (@pxref{Adding
4591 hyperlink types}), any property you store with
4592 @code{org-store-link-props} can be accessed in remember templates in a
4596 Link type | Available keywords
4597 -------------------+----------------------------------------------
4598 bbdb | %:name %:company
4599 vm, wl, mh, rmail | %:type %:subject %:message-id
4600 | %:from %:fromname %:fromaddress
4601 | %:to %:toname %:toaddress
4602 | %:fromto @r{(either "to NAME" or "from NAME")@footnote{This will always be the other, not the user. See the variable @code{org-from-is-user-regexp}.}}
4603 gnus | %:group, @r{for messages also all email fields}
4605 info | %:file %:node
4610 To place the cursor after template expansion use:
4613 %? @r{After completing the template, position cursor here.}
4617 If you change your mind about which template to use, call
4618 @code{org-remember} in the remember buffer. You may then select a new
4619 template that will be filled with the previous context information.
4621 @node Storing notes, Refiling notes, Remember templates, Remember
4622 @section Storing notes
4624 When you are finished preparing a note with @i{remember}, you have to
4625 press @kbd{C-c C-c} to file the note away. The handler will store the
4626 note in the file and under the headline specified in the template, or it
4627 will use the default file and headlines. The window configuration will
4628 be restored, sending you back to the working context before the call to
4629 @code{remember}. To re-use the location found during the last call to
4630 @code{remember}, exit the remember buffer with @kbd{C-u C-u C-c C-c},
4631 i.e. specify a double prefix argument to @kbd{C-c C-c}.
4633 If you want to store the note directly to a different place, use
4634 @kbd{C-u C-c C-c} instead to exit remember@footnote{Configure the
4635 variable @code{org-remember-store-without-prompt} to make this behavior
4636 the default.}. The handler will then first prompt for a target file -
4637 if you press @key{RET}, the value specified for the template is used.
4638 Then the command offers the headings tree of the selected file, with the
4639 cursor position at the default headline (if you had specified one in the
4640 template). You can either immediately press @key{RET} to get the note
4641 placed there. Or you can use the following keys to find a different
4644 @key{TAB} @r{Cycle visibility.}
4645 @key{down} / @key{up} @r{Next/previous visible headline.}
4646 n / p @r{Next/previous visible headline.}
4647 f / b @r{Next/previous headline same level.}
4649 @c 0-9 @r{Digit argument.}
4652 Pressing @key{RET} or @key{left} or @key{right}
4653 then leads to the following result.
4655 @multitable @columnfractions 0.2 0.15 0.65
4656 @item @b{Cursor position} @tab @b{Key} @tab @b{Note gets inserted}
4657 @item on headline @tab @key{RET} @tab as sublevel of the heading at cursor, first or last
4658 @item @tab @tab depending on @code{org-reverse-note-order}.
4659 @item @tab @key{left}/@key{right} @tab as same level, before/after current heading
4660 @item buffer-start @tab @key{RET} @tab as level 2 heading at end of file or level 1 at beginning
4661 @item @tab @tab depending on @code{org-reverse-note-order}.
4662 @item not on headline @tab @key{RET}
4663 @tab at cursor position, level taken from context.
4666 Before inserting the text into a tree, the function ensures that the
4667 text has a headline, i.e. a first line that starts with a @samp{*}. If
4668 not, a headline is constructed from the current date and some additional
4669 data. If you have indented the text of the note below the headline, the
4670 indentation will be adapted if inserting the note into the tree requires
4671 demotion from level 1.
4673 @node Refiling notes, , Storing notes, Remember
4674 @section Refiling notes
4675 @cindex refiling notes
4677 Remember is usually used to quickly capture notes and tasks into one or
4678 a few capture lists. When reviewing the captured data, you may want to
4679 refile some of the entries into a different list, for example into a
4680 project. Cutting, finding the right location and then pasting the note
4681 is cumbersome. To simplify this process, you can use the following
4687 Refile the entry at point. This command offers possible locations for
4688 refiling the entry and lets you select one with completion. The item is
4689 filed below the target heading as a subitem. Depending on
4690 @code{org-reverse-note-order}, it will be either the first of last
4691 subitem.@* By default, all level 1 headlines in the current buffer are
4692 considered to be targets, but you can have more complex definitions
4693 across a number of files. See the variable @code{org-refile-targets}
4697 Use the refile interface to jump to a heading.
4698 @kindex C-u C-u C-c C-w
4699 @item C- C-u C-c C-w
4700 Jump to the location where @code{org-refile} last moved a tree to.
4703 @node Agenda views, Embedded LaTeX, Remember, Top
4704 @chapter Agenda Views
4705 @cindex agenda views
4707 Due to the way Org-mode works, TODO items, time-stamped items, and
4708 tagged headlines can be scattered throughout a file or even a number of
4709 files. To get an overview of open action items, or of events that are
4710 important for a particular date, this information must be collected,
4711 sorted and displayed in an organized way.
4713 Org-mode can select items based on various criteria, and display them
4714 in a separate buffer. Six different view types are provided:
4718 an @emph{agenda} that is like a calendar and shows information
4721 a @emph{TODO list} that covers all unfinished
4724 a @emph{tags view}, showings headlines based on
4725 the tags associated with them,
4727 a @emph{timeline view} that shows all events in a single Org-mode file,
4728 in time-sorted view,
4730 a @emph{stuck projects view} showing projects that currently don't move
4733 @emph{custom views} that are special tag/keyword searches and
4734 combinations of different views.
4738 The extracted information is displayed in a special @emph{agenda
4739 buffer}. This buffer is read-only, but provides commands to visit the
4740 corresponding locations in the original Org-mode files, and even to
4741 edit these files remotely.
4743 Two variables control how the agenda buffer is displayed and whether the
4744 window configuration is restored when the agenda exits:
4745 @code{org-agenda-window-setup} and
4746 @code{org-agenda-restore-windows-after-quit}.
4749 * Agenda files:: Files being searched for agenda information
4750 * Agenda dispatcher:: Keyboard access to agenda views
4751 * Built-in agenda views:: What is available out of the box?
4752 * Presentation and sorting:: How agenda items are prepared for display
4753 * Agenda commands:: Remote editing of org trees
4754 * Custom agenda views:: Defining special searches and views
4757 @node Agenda files, Agenda dispatcher, Agenda views, Agenda views
4758 @section Agenda files
4759 @cindex agenda files
4760 @cindex files for agenda
4762 The information to be shown is normally collected from all @emph{agenda
4763 files}, the files listed in the variable
4764 @code{org-agenda-files}@footnote{If the value of that variable is not a
4765 list, but a single file name, then the list of agenda files will be
4766 maintained in that external file.}. If a directory is part of this list,
4767 all files with the extension @file{.org} in this directory will be part
4770 Thus even if you only work with a single Org-mode file, this file should
4771 be put into that list@footnote{When using the dispatcher, pressing
4772 @kbd{<} before selecting a command will actually limit the command to
4773 the current file, and ignore @code{org-agenda-files} until the next
4774 dispatcher command.}. You can customize @code{org-agenda-files}, but
4775 the easiest way to maintain it is through the following commands
4777 @cindex files, adding to agenda list
4781 Add current file to the list of agenda files. The file is added to
4782 the front of the list. If it was already in the list, it is moved to
4783 the front. With prefix arg, file is added/moved to the end.
4786 Remove current file from the list of agenda files.
4791 Cycle through agenda file list, visiting one file after the other.
4795 The Org menu contains the current list of files and can be used
4796 to visit any of them.
4798 If you would like to focus the agenda temporarily onto a file not in
4799 this list, or onto just one file in the list or even only a subtree in a
4800 file, this can be done in different ways. For a single agenda command,
4801 you may press @kbd{<} once or several times in the dispatcher
4802 (@pxref{Agenda dispatcher}). To restrict the agenda scope for an
4803 extended period, use the following commands:
4808 Permanently restrict the agenda to the current subtree. When with a
4809 prefix argument, or with the cursor before the first headline in a file,
4810 the agenda scope is set to the entire file. This restriction remains in
4811 effect until removed with @kbd{C-c C-x >}, or by typing either @kbd{<}
4812 or @kbd{>} in the agenda dispatcher. If there is a window displaying an
4813 agenda view, the new restriction takes effect immediately.
4816 Remove the permanent restriction created by @kbd{C-c C-x <}.
4820 When working with @file{Speedbar}, you can use the following commands in
4824 @item < @r{in the speedbar frame}
4825 Permanently restrict the agenda to the item at the cursor in the
4826 speedbar frame, either an Org-mode file or a subtree in such a file.
4827 If there is a window displaying an agenda view, the new restriction takes
4830 @item > @r{in the speedbar frame}
4831 Lift the restriction again.
4834 @node Agenda dispatcher, Built-in agenda views, Agenda files, Agenda views
4835 @section The agenda dispatcher
4836 @cindex agenda dispatcher
4837 @cindex dispatching agenda commands
4838 The views are created through a dispatcher that should be bound to a
4839 global key, for example @kbd{C-c a} (@pxref{Installation}). In the
4840 following we will assume that @kbd{C-c a} is indeed how the dispatcher
4841 is accessed and list keyboard access to commands accordingly. After
4842 pressing @kbd{C-c a}, an additional letter is required to execute a
4843 command. The dispatcher offers the following default commands:
4846 Create the calendar-like agenda (@pxref{Weekly/Daily agenda}).
4848 Create a list of all TODO items (@pxref{Global TODO list}).
4850 Create a list of headlines matching a TAGS expression (@pxref{Matching
4851 tags and properties}).
4853 Create the timeline view for the current buffer (@pxref{Timeline}).
4855 Create a list of stuck projects (@pxref{Stuck projects}).
4857 Search for a regular expression in all agenda files and additionally in
4858 the files listed in @code{org-agenda-multi-occur-extra-files}. This
4859 uses the Emacs command @code{multi-occur}. A prefix argument can be
4860 used to specify the number of context lines for each match, default is
4863 Restrict an agenda command to the current buffer@footnote{For backward
4864 compatibility, you can also press @kbd{1} to restrict to the current
4865 buffer.}. After pressing @kbd{<}, you still need to press the character
4866 selecting the command.
4868 If there is an active region, restrict the following agenda command to
4869 the region. Otherwise, restrict it to the current subtree@footnote{For
4870 backward compatibility, you can also press @kbd{0} to restrict to the
4871 current buffer.}. After pressing @kbd{< <}, you still need to press the
4872 character selecting the command.
4875 You can also define custom commands that will be accessible through the
4876 dispatcher, just like the default commands. This includes the
4877 possibility to create extended agenda buffers that contain several
4878 blocks together, for example the weekly agenda, the global TODO list and
4879 a number of special tags matches. @xref{Custom agenda views}.
4881 @node Built-in agenda views, Presentation and sorting, Agenda dispatcher, Agenda views
4882 @section The built-in agenda views
4884 In this section we describe the built-in views.
4887 * Weekly/Daily agenda:: The calendar page with current tasks
4888 * Global TODO list:: All unfinished action items
4889 * Matching tags and properties:: Structured information with fine-tuned search
4890 * Timeline:: Time-sorted view for single file
4891 * Stuck projects:: Find projects you need to review
4894 @node Weekly/Daily agenda, Global TODO list, Built-in agenda views, Built-in agenda views
4895 @subsection The weekly/daily agenda
4897 @cindex weekly agenda
4898 @cindex daily agenda
4900 The purpose of the weekly/daily @emph{agenda} is to act like a page of a
4901 paper agenda, showing all the tasks for the current week or day.
4904 @cindex org-agenda, command
4907 Compile an agenda for the current week from a list of org files. The
4908 agenda shows the entries for each day. With a numeric
4909 prefix@footnote{For backward compatibility, the universal prefix
4910 @kbd{C-u} causes all TODO entries to be listed before the agenda. This
4911 feature is deprecated, use the dedicated TODO list, or a block agenda
4912 instead.} (like @kbd{C-u 2 1 C-c a a}) you may set the number of days
4913 to be displayed (see also the variable @code{org-agenda-ndays})
4916 Remote editing from the agenda buffer means, for example, that you can
4917 change the dates of deadlines and appointments from the agenda buffer.
4918 The commands available in the Agenda buffer are listed in @ref{Agenda
4921 @subsubheading Calendar/Diary integration
4922 @cindex calendar integration
4923 @cindex diary integration
4925 Emacs contains the calendar and diary by Edward M. Reingold. The
4926 calendar displays a three-month calendar with holidays from different
4927 countries and cultures. The diary allows you to keep track of
4928 anniversaries, lunar phases, sunrise/set, recurrent appointments
4929 (weekly, monthly) and more. In this way, it is quite complementary to
4930 Org-mode. It can be very useful to combine output from Org-mode with
4933 In order to include entries from the Emacs diary into Org-mode's
4934 agenda, you only need to customize the variable
4937 (setq org-agenda-include-diary t)
4940 @noindent After that, everything will happen automatically. All diary
4941 entries including holidays, anniversaries etc will be included in the
4942 agenda buffer created by Org-mode. @key{SPC}, @key{TAB}, and
4943 @key{RET} can be used from the agenda buffer to jump to the diary
4944 file in order to edit existing diary entries. The @kbd{i} command to
4945 insert new entries for the current date works in the agenda buffer, as
4946 well as the commands @kbd{S}, @kbd{M}, and @kbd{C} to display
4947 Sunrise/Sunset times, show lunar phases and to convert to other
4948 calendars, respectively. @kbd{c} can be used to switch back and forth
4949 between calendar and agenda.
4951 If you are using the diary only for sexp entries and holidays, it is
4952 faster to not use the above setting, but instead to copy or even move
4953 the entries into an Org-mode file. Org-mode evaluates diary-style sexp
4954 entries, and does it faster because there is no overhead for first
4955 creating the diary display. Note that the sexp entries must start at
4956 the left margin, no white space is allowed before them. For example,
4957 the following segment of an Org-mode file will be processed and entries
4958 will be made in the agenda:
4961 * Birthdays and similar stuff
4963 %%(org-calendar-holiday) ; special function for holiday names
4965 %%(diary-anniversary 14 5 1956) Arthur Dent is %d years old
4966 %%(diary-anniversary 2 10 1869) Mahatma Gandhi would be %d years old
4969 @subsubheading Appointment reminders
4970 @cindex @file{appt.el}
4971 @cindex appointment reminders
4973 Org can interact with Emacs appointments notification facility.
4975 To add all the appointments of your agenda files, use the command
4976 @code{org-agenda-to-appt}. This commands also lets you filter through
4977 the list of your appointments and add only those belonging to a specific
4978 category or matching a regular expression. See the docstring for
4981 @node Global TODO list, Matching tags and properties, Weekly/Daily agenda, Built-in agenda views
4982 @subsection The global TODO list
4983 @cindex global TODO list
4984 @cindex TODO list, global
4986 The global TODO list contains all unfinished TODO items, formatted and
4987 collected into a single place.
4992 Show the global TODO list. This collects the TODO items from all
4993 agenda files (@pxref{Agenda views}) into a single buffer. The buffer is in
4994 @code{agenda-mode}, so there are commands to examine and manipulate
4995 the TODO entries directly from that buffer (@pxref{Agenda commands}).
4998 @cindex TODO keyword matching
4999 Like the above, but allows selection of a specific TODO keyword. You
5000 can also do this by specifying a prefix argument to @kbd{C-c a t}. With
5001 a @kbd{C-u} prefix you are prompted for a keyword, and you may also
5002 specify several keywords by separating them with @samp{|} as boolean OR
5003 operator. With a numeric prefix, the Nth keyword in
5004 @code{org-todo-keywords} is selected.
5006 The @kbd{r} key in the agenda buffer regenerates it, and you can give
5007 a prefix argument to this command to change the selected TODO keyword,
5008 for example @kbd{3 r}. If you often need a search for a specific
5009 keyword, define a custom command for it (@pxref{Agenda dispatcher}).@*
5010 Matching specific TODO keywords can also be done as part of a tags
5011 search (@pxref{Tag searches}).
5014 Remote editing of TODO items means that you can change the state of a
5015 TODO entry with a single key press. The commands available in the
5016 TODO list are described in @ref{Agenda commands}.
5018 @cindex sublevels, inclusion into todo list
5019 Normally the global todo list simply shows all headlines with TODO
5020 keywords. This list can become very long. There are two ways to keep
5024 Some people view a TODO item that has been @emph{scheduled} for
5025 execution (@pxref{Time stamps}) as no longer @emph{open}. Configure the
5026 variable @code{org-agenda-todo-ignore-scheduled} to exclude scheduled
5027 items from the global TODO list.
5029 TODO items may have sublevels to break up the task into subtasks. In
5030 such cases it may be enough to list only the highest level TODO headline
5031 and omit the sublevels from the global list. Configure the variable
5032 @code{org-agenda-todo-list-sublevels} to get this behavior.
5035 @node Matching tags and properties, Timeline, Global TODO list, Built-in agenda views
5036 @subsection Matching Tags and Properties
5037 @cindex matching, of tags
5038 @cindex matching, of properties
5041 If headlines in the agenda files are marked with @emph{tags}
5042 (@pxref{Tags}), you can select headlines based on the tags that apply
5043 to them and collect them into an agenda buffer.
5048 Produce a list of all headlines that match a given set of tags. The
5049 command prompts for a selection criterion, which is a boolean logic
5050 expression with tags, like @samp{+work+urgent-withboss} or
5051 @samp{work|home} (@pxref{Tags}). If you often need a specific search,
5052 define a custom command for it (@pxref{Agenda dispatcher}).
5055 Like @kbd{C-c a m}, but only select headlines that are also TODO items
5056 and force checking subitems (see variable
5057 @code{org-tags-match-list-sublevels}). Matching specific todo keywords
5058 together with a tags match is also possible, see @ref{Tag searches}.
5061 The commands available in the tags list are described in @ref{Agenda
5064 @node Timeline, Stuck projects, Matching tags and properties, Built-in agenda views
5065 @subsection Timeline for a single file
5066 @cindex timeline, single file
5067 @cindex time-sorted view
5069 The timeline summarizes all time-stamped items from a single Org-mode
5070 file in a @emph{time-sorted view}. The main purpose of this command is
5071 to give an overview over events in a project.
5076 Show a time-sorted view of the org file, with all time-stamped items.
5077 When called with a @kbd{C-u} prefix, all unfinished TODO entries
5078 (scheduled or not) are also listed under the current date.
5082 The commands available in the timeline buffer are listed in
5083 @ref{Agenda commands}.
5086 @node Stuck projects, , Timeline, Built-in agenda views
5087 @subsection Stuck projects
5089 If you are following a system like David Allen's GTD to organize your
5090 work, one of the ``duties'' you have is a regular review to make sure
5091 that all projects move along. A @emph{stuck} project is a project that
5092 has no defined next actions, so it will never show up in the TODO lists
5093 Org-mode produces. During the review, you need to identify such
5094 projects and define next actions for them.
5099 List projects that are stuck.
5102 Customize the variable @code{org-stuck-projects} to define what a stuck
5103 project is and how to find it.
5106 You almost certainly will have to configure this view before it will
5107 work for you. The built-in default assumes that all your projects are
5108 level-2 headlines, and that a project is not stuck if it has at least
5109 one entry marked with a todo keyword TODO or NEXT or NEXTACTION.
5111 Lets assume that you, in your own way of using Org-mode, identify
5112 projects with a tag PROJECT, and that you use a todo keyword MAYBE to
5113 indicate a project that should not be considered yet. Lets further
5114 assume that the todo keyword DONE marks finished projects, and that NEXT
5115 and TODO indicate next actions. The tag @@SHOP indicates shopping and
5116 is a next action even without the NEXT tag. Finally, if the project
5117 contains the special word IGNORE anywhere, it should not be listed
5118 either. In this case you would start by identifying eligible projects
5119 with a tags/todo match @samp{+PROJECT/-MAYBE-DONE}, and then check for
5120 TODO, NEXT, @@SHOP, and IGNORE in the subtree to identify projects that
5121 are not stuck. The correct customization for this is
5124 (setq org-stuck-projects
5125 '("+PROJECT/-MAYBE-DONE" ("NEXT" "TODO") ("@@SHOP")
5130 @node Presentation and sorting, Agenda commands, Built-in agenda views, Agenda views
5131 @section Presentation and sorting
5132 @cindex presentation, of agenda items
5134 Before displaying items in an agenda view, Org-mode visually prepares
5135 the items and sorts them. Each item occupies a single line. The line
5136 starts with a @emph{prefix} that contains the @emph{category}
5137 (@pxref{Categories}) of the item and other important information. You can
5138 customize the prefix using the option @code{org-agenda-prefix-format}.
5139 The prefix is followed by a cleaned-up version of the outline headline
5140 associated with the item.
5143 * Categories:: Not all tasks are equal
5144 * Time-of-day specifications:: How the agenda knows the time
5145 * Sorting of agenda items:: The order of things
5148 @node Categories, Time-of-day specifications, Presentation and sorting, Presentation and sorting
5149 @subsection Categories
5152 The category is a broad label assigned to each agenda item. By default,
5153 the category is simply derived from the file name, but you can also
5154 specify it with a special line in the buffer, like this@footnote{For
5155 backward compatibility, the following also works: If there are several
5156 such lines in a file, each specifies the category for the text below it.
5157 The first category also applies to any text before the first CATEGORY
5158 line. However, using this method is @emph{strongly} deprecated as it is
5159 incompatible with the outline structure of the document. The correct
5160 method for setting multiple categories in a buffer is using a
5168 If you would like to have a special CATEGORY for a single entry or a
5169 (sub)tree, give the entry a @code{:CATEGORY:} property with the location
5170 as the value (@pxref{Properties and columns}).
5173 The display in the agenda buffer looks best if the category is not
5174 longer than 10 characters.
5176 @node Time-of-day specifications, Sorting of agenda items, Categories, Presentation and sorting
5177 @subsection Time-of-Day Specifications
5178 @cindex time-of-day specification
5180 Org-mode checks each agenda item for a time-of-day specification. The
5181 time can be part of the time stamp that triggered inclusion into the
5182 agenda, for example as in @w{@samp{<2005-05-10 Tue 19:00>}}. Time
5183 ranges can be specified with two time stamps, like
5185 @w{@samp{<2005-05-10 Tue 20:30>--<2005-05-10 Tue 22:15>}}.
5187 In the headline of the entry itself, a time(range) may also appear as
5188 plain text (like @samp{12:45} or a @samp{8:30-1pm}. If the agenda
5189 integrates the Emacs diary (@pxref{Weekly/Daily agenda}), time
5190 specifications in diary entries are recognized as well.
5192 For agenda display, Org-mode extracts the time and displays it in a
5193 standard 24 hour format as part of the prefix. The example times in
5194 the previous paragraphs would end up in the agenda like this:
5197 8:30-13:00 Arthur Dent lies in front of the bulldozer
5198 12:45...... Ford Prefect arrives and takes Arthur to the pub
5199 19:00...... The Vogon reads his poem
5200 20:30-22:15 Marwin escorts the Hitchhikers to the bridge
5204 If the agenda is in single-day mode, or for the display of today, the
5205 timed entries are embedded in a time grid, like
5208 8:00...... ------------------
5209 8:30-13:00 Arthur Dent lies in front of the bulldozer
5210 10:00...... ------------------
5211 12:00...... ------------------
5212 12:45...... Ford Prefect arrives and takes Arthur to the pub
5213 14:00...... ------------------
5214 16:00...... ------------------
5215 18:00...... ------------------
5216 19:00...... The Vogon reads his poem
5217 20:00...... ------------------
5218 20:30-22:15 Marwin escorts the Hitchhikers to the bridge
5221 The time grid can be turned on and off with the variable
5222 @code{org-agenda-use-time-grid}, and can be configured with
5223 @code{org-agenda-time-grid}.
5225 @node Sorting of agenda items, , Time-of-day specifications, Presentation and sorting
5226 @subsection Sorting of agenda items
5227 @cindex sorting, of agenda items
5228 @cindex priorities, of agenda items
5229 Before being inserted into a view, the items are sorted. How this is
5230 done depends on the type of view.
5233 For the daily/weekly agenda, the items for each day are sorted. The
5234 default order is to first collect all items containing an explicit
5235 time-of-day specification. These entries will be shown at the beginning
5236 of the list, as a @emph{schedule} for the day. After that, items remain
5237 grouped in categories, in the sequence given by @code{org-agenda-files}.
5238 Within each category, items are sorted by priority (@pxref{Priorities}),
5239 which is composed of the base priority (2000 for priority @samp{A}, 1000
5240 for @samp{B}, and 0 for @samp{C}), plus additional increments for
5241 overdue scheduled or deadline items.
5243 For the TODO list, items remain in the order of categories, but within
5244 each category, sorting takes place according to priority
5245 (@pxref{Priorities}).
5247 For tags matches, items are not sorted at all, but just appear in the
5248 sequence in which they are found in the agenda files.
5251 Sorting can be customized using the variable
5252 @code{org-agenda-sorting-strategy}.
5255 @node Agenda commands, Custom agenda views, Presentation and sorting, Agenda views
5256 @section Commands in the agenda buffer
5257 @cindex commands, in agenda buffer
5259 Entries in the agenda buffer are linked back to the org file or diary
5260 file where they originate. You are not allowed to edit the agenda
5261 buffer itself, but commands are provided to show and jump to the
5262 original entry location, and to edit the org-files ``remotely'' from
5263 the agenda buffer. In this way, all information is stored only once,
5264 removing the risk that your agenda and note files may diverge.
5266 Some commands can be executed with mouse clicks on agenda lines. For
5267 the other commands, the cursor needs to be in the desired line.
5270 @tsubheading{Motion}
5271 @cindex motion commands in agenda
5274 Next line (same as @key{up} and @kbd{C-p}).
5277 Previous line (same as @key{down} and @kbd{C-n}).
5278 @tsubheading{View/GoTo org file}
5283 Display the original location of the item in another window.
5287 Display original location and recenter that window.
5295 Go to the original location of the item in another window. Under Emacs
5296 22, @kbd{mouse-1} will also works for this.
5300 Go to the original location of the item and delete other windows.
5304 Toggle Follow mode. In Follow mode, as you move the cursor through
5305 the agenda buffer, the other window always shows the corresponding
5306 location in the org file. The initial setting for this mode in new
5307 agenda buffers can be set with the variable
5308 @code{org-agenda-start-with-follow-mode}.
5312 Display the entire subtree of the current item in an indirect buffer.
5313 With numerical prefix ARG, go up to this level and then take that tree.
5314 If ARG is negative, go up that many levels. With @kbd{C-u} prefix, do
5315 not remove the previously used indirect buffer.
5319 Toggle Logbook mode. In Logbook mode, entries that where marked DONE while
5320 logging was on (variable @code{org-log-done}) are shown in the agenda,
5321 as are entries that have been clocked on that day.
5323 @tsubheading{Change display}
5324 @cindex display changing, in agenda
5327 Delete other windows.
5334 Switch to day/week/month/year view. When switching to day or week view,
5335 this setting becomes the default for subseqent agenda commands. Since
5336 month and year views are slow to create, the do not become the default.
5340 Toggle the inclusion of diary entries. See @ref{Weekly/Daily agenda}.
5344 Toggle the time grid on and off. See also the variables
5345 @code{org-agenda-use-time-grid} and @code{org-agenda-time-grid}.
5349 Recreate the agenda buffer, for example to reflect the changes
5350 after modification of the time stamps of items with S-@key{left} and
5351 S-@key{right}. When the buffer is the global todo list, a prefix
5352 argument is interpreted to create a selective list for a specific TODO
5362 Save all Org-mode buffers in the current Emacs session.
5366 Display the following @code{org-agenda-ndays} days. For example, if
5367 the display covers a week, switch to the following week. With prefix
5368 arg, go forward that many times @code{org-agenda-ndays} days.
5372 Display the previous dates.
5378 @tsubheading{Remote editing}
5379 @cindex remote editing, from agenda
5384 @cindex undoing remote-editing events
5385 @cindex remote editing, undo
5388 Undo a change due to a remote editing command. The change is undone
5389 both in the agenda buffer and in the remote buffer.
5393 Change the TODO state of the item, both in the agenda and in the
5398 Delete the current agenda item along with the entire subtree belonging
5399 to it in the original Org-mode file. If the text to be deleted remotely
5400 is longer than one line, the kill needs to be confirmed by the user. See
5401 variable @code{org-agenda-confirm-kill}.
5405 Archive the subtree corresponding to the current headline.
5409 Show all tags associated with the current item. Because of
5410 inheritance, this may be more than the tags listed in the line itself.
5414 Set tags for the current headline. If there is an active region in the
5415 agenda, change a tag for all headings in the region.
5419 Toggle the ARCHIVE tag for the current headline.
5423 Set the priority for the current item. Org-mode prompts for the
5424 priority character. If you reply with @key{SPC}, the priority cookie
5425 is removed from the entry.
5429 Display weighted priority of current item.
5435 Increase the priority of the current item. The priority is changed in
5436 the original buffer, but the agenda is not resorted. Use the @kbd{r}
5440 @kindex S-@key{down}
5443 Decrease the priority of the current item.
5451 Set a deadline for this item.
5453 @kindex S-@key{right}
5455 Change the time stamp associated with the current line by one day into
5456 the future. With prefix argument, change it by that many days. For
5457 example, @kbd{3 6 5 S-@key{right}} will change it by a year. The
5458 stamp is changed in the original org file, but the change is not
5459 directly reflected in the agenda buffer. Use the
5460 @kbd{r} key to update the buffer.
5462 @kindex S-@key{left}
5464 Change the time stamp associated with the current line by one day
5469 Change the time stamp associated with the current line to today.
5470 The key @kbd{>} has been chosen, because it is the same as @kbd{S-.}
5475 Start the clock on the current item. If a clock is running already, it
5480 Stop the previously started clock.
5484 Cancel the currently running clock.
5488 Jump to the running clock in another window.
5490 @tsubheading{Calendar commands}
5491 @cindex calendar commands, from agenda
5494 Open the Emacs calendar and move to the date at the agenda cursor.
5497 When in the calendar, compute and show the Org-mode agenda for the
5500 @cindex diary entries, creating from agenda
5503 Insert a new entry into the diary. Prompts for the type of entry
5504 (day, weekly, monthly, yearly, anniversary, cyclic) and creates a new
5505 entry in the diary, just as @kbd{i d} etc. would do in the calendar.
5506 The date is taken from the cursor position.
5510 Show the phases of the moon for the three months around current date.
5514 Show sunrise and sunset times. The geographical location must be set
5515 with calendar variables, see documentation of the Emacs calendar.
5519 Convert the date at cursor into many other cultural and historic
5524 Show holidays for three month around the cursor date.
5526 @c FIXME: This should be a different key.
5529 Export a single iCalendar file containing entries from all agenda files.
5531 @tsubheading{Exporting to a file}
5534 @cindex exporting agenda views
5535 @cindex agenda views, exporting
5536 Write the agenda view to a file. Depending on the extension of the
5537 selected file name, the view will be exported as HTML (extension
5538 @file{.html} or @file{.htm}), Postscript (extension @file{.ps}), or
5539 plain text (any other extension). Use the variable
5540 @code{org-agenda-exporter-settings} to set options for @file{ps-print}
5541 and for @file{htmlize} to be used during export.
5543 @tsubheading{Quit and Exit}
5546 Quit agenda, remove the agenda buffer.
5549 @cindex agenda files, removing buffers
5551 Exit agenda, remove the agenda buffer and all buffers loaded by Emacs
5552 for the compilation of the agenda. Buffers created by the user to
5553 visit org files will not be removed.
5557 @node Custom agenda views, , Agenda commands, Agenda views
5558 @section Custom agenda views
5559 @cindex custom agenda views
5560 @cindex agenda views, custom
5562 Custom agenda commands serve two purposes: to store and quickly access
5563 frequently used TODO and tags searches, and to create special composite
5564 agenda buffers. Custom agenda commands will be accessible through the
5565 dispatcher (@pxref{Agenda dispatcher}), just like the default commands.
5568 * Storing searches:: Type once, use often
5569 * Block agenda:: All the stuff you need in a single buffer
5570 * Setting Options:: Changing the rules
5571 * Exporting Agenda Views:: Writing agendas to files.
5572 * Extracting Agenda Information for other programs::
5575 @node Storing searches, Block agenda, Custom agenda views, Custom agenda views
5576 @subsection Storing searches
5578 The first application of custom searches is the definition of keyboard
5579 shortcuts for frequently used searches, either creating an agenda
5580 buffer, or a sparse tree (the latter covering of course only the current
5583 Custom commands are configured in the variable
5584 @code{org-agenda-custom-commands}. You can customize this variable, for
5585 example by pressing @kbd{C-c a C}. You can also directly set it with
5586 Emacs Lisp in @file{.emacs}. The following example contains all valid
5591 (setq org-agenda-custom-commands
5592 '(("w" todo "WAITING")
5593 ("W" todo-tree "WAITING")
5594 ("u" tags "+boss-urgent")
5595 ("v" tags-todo "+boss-urgent")
5596 ("U" tags-tree "+boss-urgent")
5597 ("f" occur-tree "\\<FIXME\\>")
5598 ("h" . "HOME+Name tags searches") ; description for "h" prefix
5599 ("hl" tags "+home+Lisa")
5600 ("hp" tags "+home+Peter")
5601 ("hk" tags "+home+Kim")))
5606 The initial string in each entry defines the keys you have to press
5607 after the dispatcher command @kbd{C-c a} in order to access the command.
5608 Usually this will be just a single character, but if you have many
5609 similar commands, you can also define two-letter combinations where the
5610 first character is the same in several combinations and serves as a
5611 prefix key@footnote{You can provide a description for a prefix key by
5612 inserting a cons cell with the prefix and the description.}. The second
5613 parameter is the search type, followed by the string or regular
5614 expression to be used for the matching. The example above will
5619 as a global search for TODO entries with @samp{WAITING} as the TODO
5622 as the same search, but only in the current buffer and displaying the
5623 results as a sparse tree
5625 as a global tags search for headlines marked @samp{:boss:} but not
5628 as the same search as @kbd{C-c a u}, but limiting the search to
5629 headlines that are also TODO items
5631 as the same search as @kbd{C-c a u}, but only in the current buffer and
5632 displaying the result as a sparse tree
5634 to create a sparse tree (again: current buffer only) with all entries
5635 containing the word @samp{FIXME}
5637 as a prefix command for a HOME tags search where you have to press an
5638 additional key (@kbd{l}, @kbd{p} or @kbd{k}) to select a name (Lisa,
5639 Peter, or Kim) as additional tag to match.
5642 @node Block agenda, Setting Options, Storing searches, Custom agenda views
5643 @subsection Block agenda
5644 @cindex block agenda
5645 @cindex agenda, with block views
5647 Another possibility is the construction of agenda views that comprise
5648 the results of @emph{several} commands, each of which creates a block in
5649 the agenda buffer. The available commands include @code{agenda} for the
5650 daily or weekly agenda (as created with @kbd{C-c a a}), @code{alltodo}
5651 for the global todo list (as constructed with @kbd{C-c a t}), and the
5652 matching commands discussed above: @code{todo}, @code{tags}, and
5653 @code{tags-todo}. Here are two examples:
5657 (setq org-agenda-custom-commands
5658 '(("h" "Agenda and Home-related tasks"
5662 ("o" "Agenda and Office-related tasks"
5670 This will define @kbd{C-c a h} to create a multi-block view for stuff
5671 you need to attend to at home. The resulting agenda buffer will contain
5672 your agenda for the current week, all TODO items that carry the tag
5673 @samp{home}, and also all lines tagged with @samp{garden}. Finally the
5674 command @kbd{C-c a o} provides a similar view for office tasks.
5677 @node Setting Options, Exporting Agenda Views, Block agenda, Custom agenda views
5678 @subsection Setting Options for custom commands
5679 @cindex options, for custom agenda views
5681 Org-mode contains a number of variables regulating agenda construction
5682 and display. The global variables define the behavior for all agenda
5683 commands, including the custom commands. However, if you want to change
5684 some settings just for a single custom view, you can do so. Setting
5685 options requires inserting a list of variable names and values at the
5686 right spot in @code{org-agenda-custom-commands}. For example:
5690 (setq org-agenda-custom-commands
5691 '(("w" todo "WAITING"
5692 ((org-agenda-sorting-strategy '(priority-down))
5693 (org-agenda-prefix-format " Mixed: ")))
5694 ("U" tags-tree "+boss-urgent"
5695 ((org-show-following-heading nil)
5696 (org-show-hierarchy-above nil)))))
5701 Now the @kbd{C-c a w} command will sort the collected entries only by
5702 priority, and the prefix format is modified to just say @samp{ Mixed: }
5703 instead of giving the category of the entry. The sparse tags tree of
5704 @kbd{C-c a U} will now turn out ultra-compact, because neither the
5705 headline hierarchy above the match, nor the headline following the match
5708 For command sets creating a block agenda,
5709 @code{org-agenda-custom-commands} has two separate spots for setting
5710 options. You can add options that should be valid for just a single
5711 command in the set, and options that should be valid for all commands in
5712 the set. The former are just added to the command entry, the latter
5713 must come after the list of command entries. Going back to the block
5714 agenda example (@pxref{Block agenda}), let's change the sorting strategy
5715 for the @kbd{C-c a h} commands to @code{priority-down}, but let's sort
5716 the results for GARDEN tags query in the opposite order,
5717 @code{priority-up}. This would look like this:
5721 (setq org-agenda-custom-commands
5722 '(("h" "Agenda and Home-related tasks"
5726 ((org-agenda-sorting-strategy '(priority-up)))))
5727 ((org-agenda-sorting-strategy '(priority-down))))
5728 ("o" "Agenda and Office-related tasks"
5735 As you see, the values and parenthesis setting is a little complex.
5736 When in doubt, use the customize interface to set this variable - it
5737 fully supports its structure. Just one caveat: When setting options in
5738 this interface, the @emph{values} are just lisp expressions. So if the
5739 value is a string, you need to add the double quotes around the value
5743 @node Exporting Agenda Views, Extracting Agenda Information for other programs, Setting Options, Custom agenda views
5744 @subsection Exporting Agenda Views
5745 @cindex agenda views, exporting
5747 If you are away from your computer, it can be very useful to have a
5748 printed version of some agenda views to carry around. Org-mode can
5749 export custom agenda views as plain text, HTML@footnote{You need to
5750 install Hrvoje Niksic' @file{htmlize.el}.} and postscript. If you want
5751 to do this only occasionally, use the command
5756 @cindex exporting agenda views
5757 @cindex agenda views, exporting
5758 Write the agenda view to a file. Depending on the extension of the
5759 selected file name, the view will be exported as HTML (extension
5760 @file{.html} or @file{.htm}), Postscript (extension @file{.ps}), or
5761 plain text (any other extension). Use the variable
5762 @code{org-agenda-exporter-settings} to set options for @file{ps-print}
5763 and for @file{htmlize} to be used during export, for example
5765 (setq org-agenda-exporter-settings
5766 '((ps-number-of-columns 2)
5767 (ps-landscape-mode t)
5768 (htmlize-output-type 'css)))
5772 If you need to export certain agenda views frequently, you can associate
5773 any custom agenda command with a list of output file names
5774 @footnote{If you want to store standard views like the weekly agenda
5775 or the global TODO list as well, you need to define custom commands for
5776 them in order to be able to specify filenames.}. Here is an example
5777 that first does define custom commands for the agenda and the global
5778 todo list, together with a number of files to which to export them.
5779 Then we define two block agenda commands and specify filenames for them
5780 as well. File names can be relative to the current working directory,
5785 (setq org-agenda-custom-commands
5786 '(("X" agenda "" nil ("agenda.html" "agenda.ps"))
5787 ("Y" alltodo "" nil ("todo.html" "todo.txt" "todo.ps"))
5788 ("h" "Agenda and Home-related tasks"
5793 ("~/views/home.html"))
5794 ("o" "Agenda and Office-related tasks"
5799 ("~/views/office.ps"))))
5803 The extension of the file name determines the type of export. If it is
5804 @file{.html}, Org-mode will use the @file{htmlize.el} package to convert
5805 the buffer to HTML and save it to this file name. If the extension is
5806 @file{.ps}, @code{ps-print-buffer-with-faces} is used to produce
5807 postscript output. Any other extension produces a plain ASCII file.
5809 The export files are @emph{not} created when you use one of those
5810 commands interactively. Instead, there is a special command to produce
5811 @emph{all} specified files in one step:
5816 Export all agenda views that have export filenames associated with
5820 You can use the options section of the custom agenda commands to also
5821 set options for the export commands. For example:
5824 (setq org-agenda-custom-commands
5826 ((ps-number-of-columns 2)
5827 (ps-landscape-mode t)
5828 (org-agenda-prefix-format " [ ] ")
5829 (org-agenda-with-colors nil)
5830 (org-agenda-remove-tags t))
5835 This command sets two options for the postscript exporter, to make it
5836 print in two columns in landscape format - the resulting page can be cut
5837 in two and then used in a paper agenda. The remaining settings modify
5838 the agenda prefix to omit category and scheduling information, and
5839 instead include a checkbox to check off items. We also remove the tags
5840 to make the lines compact, and we don't want to use colors for the
5841 black-and-white printer. Settings specified in
5842 @code{org-agenda-exporter-settings} will also apply, but the settings
5843 in @code{org-agenda-custom-commands} take precedence.
5846 From the command line you may also use
5848 emacs -f org-batch-store-agenda-views -kill
5851 or, if you need to modify some parameters
5853 emacs -eval '(org-batch-store-agenda-views \
5854 org-agenda-ndays 30 \
5855 org-agenda-start-day "2007-11-01" \
5856 org-agenda-include-diary nil \
5857 org-agenda-files (quote ("~/org/project.org")))' \
5861 which will create the agenda views restricted to the file
5862 @file{~/org/project.org}, without diary entries and with 30 days
5865 @node Extracting Agenda Information for other programs, , Exporting Agenda Views, Custom agenda views
5866 @subsection Extracting Agenda Information for other programs
5867 @cindex agenda, pipe
5868 @cindex Scripts, for agenda processing
5870 Org-mode provides commands to access agenda information for the command
5871 line in emacs batch mode. This extracted information can be sent
5872 directly to a printer, or it can be read by a program that does further
5873 processing of the data. The first of these commands is the function
5874 @code{org-batch-agenda}, that produces an agenda view and sends it as
5875 ASCII text to STDOUT. The command takes a single string as parameter.
5876 If the string has length 1, it is used as a key to one of the commands
5877 you have configured in @code{org-agenda-custom-commands}, basically any
5878 key you can use after @kbd{C-c a}. For example, to directly print the
5879 current TODO list, you could use
5882 emacs -batch -l ~/.emacs -eval '(org-batch-agenda "t")' | lpr
5885 If the parameter is a string with 2 or more characters, it is used as a
5886 tags/todo match string. For example, to print your local shopping list
5887 (all items with the tag @samp{shop}, but excluding the tag
5888 @samp{NewYork}), you could use
5891 emacs -batch -l ~/.emacs \
5892 -eval '(org-batch-agenda "+shop-NewYork")' | lpr
5896 You may also modify parameters on the fly like this:
5899 emacs -batch -l ~/.emacs \
5900 -eval '(org-batch-agenda "a" \
5901 org-agenda-ndays 30 \
5902 org-agenda-include-diary nil \
5903 org-agenda-files (quote ("~/org/project.org")))' \
5908 which will produce a 30 day agenda, fully restricted to the Org file
5909 @file{~/org/projects.org}, not even including the diary.
5911 If you want to process the agenda data in more sophisticated ways, you
5912 can use the command @code{org-batch-agenda-csv} to get a comma-separated
5913 list of values for each agenda item. Each line in the output will
5914 contain a number of fields separated by commas. The fields in a line
5918 category @r{The category of the item}
5919 head @r{The headline, without TODO kwd, TAGS and PRIORITY}
5920 type @r{The type of the agenda entry, can be}
5921 todo @r{selected in TODO match}
5922 tagsmatch @r{selected in tags match}
5923 diary @r{imported from diary}
5924 deadline @r{a deadline}
5925 scheduled @r{scheduled}
5926 timestamp @r{appointment, selected by timestamp}
5927 closed @r{entry was closed on date}
5928 upcoming-deadline @r{warning about nearing deadline}
5929 past-scheduled @r{forwarded scheduled item}
5930 block @r{entry has date block including date}
5931 todo @r{The todo keyword, if any}
5932 tags @r{All tags including inherited ones, separated by colons}
5933 date @r{The relevant date, like 2007-2-14}
5934 time @r{The time, like 15:00-16:50}
5935 extra @r{String with extra planning info}
5936 priority-l @r{The priority letter if any was given}
5937 priority-n @r{The computed numerical priority}
5941 Time and date will only be given if a timestamp (or deadline/scheduled)
5942 lead to the selection of the item.
5944 A CSV list like this is very easy to use in a post processing script.
5945 For example, here is a Perl program that gets the TODO list from
5946 Emacs/org-mode and prints all the items, preceded by a checkbox:
5952 # define the Emacs command to run
5953 $cmd = "emacs -batch -l ~/.emacs -eval '(org-batch-agenda-csv \"t\")'";
5955 # run it and capture the output
5956 $agenda = qx@{$cmd 2>/dev/null@};
5958 # loop over all lines
5959 foreach $line (split(/\n/,$agenda)) @{
5961 # get the individual values
5962 ($category,$head,$type,$todo,$tags,$date,$time,$extra,
5963 $priority_l,$priority_n) = split(/,/,$line);
5965 # proccess and print
5966 print "[ ] $head\n";
5971 @node Embedded LaTeX, Exporting, Agenda views, Top
5972 @chapter Embedded LaTeX
5973 @cindex @TeX{} interpretation
5974 @cindex La@TeX{} interpretation
5976 Plain ASCII is normally sufficient for almost all note taking. One
5977 exception, however, are scientific notes which need to be able to
5978 contain mathematical symbols and the occasional formula.
5979 La@TeX{}@footnote{La@TeX{} is a macro system based on Donald E. Knuth's
5980 @TeX{} system. Many of the features described here as ``La@TeX{}'' are
5981 really from @TeX{}, but for simplicity I am blurring this distinction.}
5982 is widely used to typeset scientific documents. Org-mode supports
5983 embedding La@TeX{} code into its files, because many academics are used
5984 to read La@TeX{} source code, and because it can be readily processed
5985 into images for HTML production.
5987 It is not necessary to mark La@TeX{} macros and code in any special way.
5988 If you observe a few conventions, Org-mode knows how to find it and what
5992 * Math symbols:: TeX macros for symbols and Greek letters
5993 * Subscripts and Superscripts:: Simple syntax for raising/lowering text
5994 * LaTeX fragments:: Complex formulas made easy
5995 * Processing LaTeX fragments:: Previewing LaTeX processing
5996 * CDLaTeX mode:: Speed up entering of formulas
5999 @node Math symbols, Subscripts and Superscripts, Embedded LaTeX, Embedded LaTeX
6000 @section Math symbols
6001 @cindex math symbols
6004 You can use La@TeX{} macros to insert special symbols like @samp{\alpha}
6005 to indicate the Greek letter, or @samp{\to} to indicate an arrow.
6006 Completion for these macros is available, just type @samp{\} and maybe a
6007 few letters, and press @kbd{M-@key{TAB}} to see possible completions.
6008 Unlike La@TeX{} code, Org-mode allows these macros to be present
6009 without surrounding math delimiters, for example:
6012 Angles are written as Greek letters \alpha, \beta and \gamma.
6015 During HTML export (@pxref{HTML export}), these symbols are translated
6016 into the proper syntax for HTML, for the above examples this is
6017 @samp{α} and @samp{→}, respectively.
6019 @node Subscripts and Superscripts, LaTeX fragments, Math symbols, Embedded LaTeX
6020 @section Subscripts and Superscripts
6024 Just like in La@TeX{}, @samp{^} and @samp{_} are used to indicate super-
6025 and subscripts. Again, these can be used without embedding them in
6026 math-mode delimiters. To increase the readability of ASCII text, it is
6027 not necessary (but OK) to surround multi-character sub- and superscripts
6028 with curly braces. For example
6031 The mass if the sun is M_sun = 1.989 x 10^30 kg. The radius of
6032 the sun is R_@{sun@} = 6.96 x 10^8 m.
6035 To avoid interpretation as raised or lowered text, you can quote
6036 @samp{^} and @samp{_} with a backslash: @samp{\_} and @samp{\^}.
6038 During HTML export (@pxref{HTML export}), subscript and superscripts
6039 are surrounded with @code{<sub>} and @code{<sup>} tags, respectively.
6041 @node LaTeX fragments, Processing LaTeX fragments, Subscripts and Superscripts, Embedded LaTeX
6042 @section LaTeX fragments
6043 @cindex LaTeX fragments
6045 With symbols, sub- and superscripts, HTML is pretty much at its end when
6046 it comes to representing mathematical formulas@footnote{Yes, there is
6047 MathML, but that is not yet fully supported by many browsers, and there
6048 is no decent converter for turning La@TeX{} or ASCII representations of
6049 formulas into MathML. So for the time being, converting formulas into
6050 images seems the way to go.}. More complex expressions need a dedicated
6051 formula processor. To this end, Org-mode can contain arbitrary La@TeX{}
6052 fragments. It provides commands to preview the typeset result of these
6053 fragments, and upon export to HTML, all fragments will be converted to
6054 images and inlined into the HTML document@footnote{The La@TeX{} export
6055 will not use images for displaying La@TeX{} fragments but include these
6056 fragments directly into the La@TeX{} code.}. For this to work you
6057 need to be on a system with a working La@TeX{} installation. You also
6058 need the @file{dvipng} program, available at
6059 @url{http://sourceforge.net/projects/dvipng/}. The La@TeX{} header that
6060 will be used when processing a fragment can be configured with the
6061 variable @code{org-format-latex-header}.
6063 La@TeX{} fragments don't need any special marking at all. The following
6064 snippets will be identified as La@TeX{} source code:
6067 Environments of any kind. The only requirement is that the
6068 @code{\begin} statement appears on a new line, preceded by only
6071 Text within the usual La@TeX{} math delimiters. To avoid conflicts with
6072 currency specifications, single @samp{$} characters are only recognized
6073 as math delimiters if the enclosed text contains at most two line breaks,
6074 is directly attached to the @samp{$} characters with no whitespace in
6075 between, and if the closing @samp{$} is followed by whitespace or
6076 punctuation. For the other delimiters, there is no such restriction, so
6077 when in doubt, use @samp{\(...\)} as inline math delimiters.
6080 @noindent For example:
6083 \begin@{equation@} % arbitrary environments,
6084 x=\sqrt@{b@} % even tables, figures
6085 \end@{equation@} % etc
6087 If $a^2=b$ and \( b=2 \), then the solution must be
6088 either $$ a=+\sqrt@{2@} $$ or \[ a=-\sqrt@{2@} \].
6092 If you need any of the delimiter ASCII sequences for other purposes, you
6093 can configure the option @code{org-format-latex-options} to deselect the
6094 ones you do not wish to have interpreted by the La@TeX{} converter.
6096 @node Processing LaTeX fragments, CDLaTeX mode, LaTeX fragments, Embedded LaTeX
6097 @section Processing LaTeX fragments
6098 @cindex LaTeX fragments, preview
6100 La@TeX{} fragments can be processed to produce a preview images of the
6101 typeset expressions:
6106 Produce a preview image of the La@TeX{} fragment at point and overlay it
6107 over the source code. If there is no fragment at point, process all
6108 fragments in the current entry (between two headlines). When called
6109 with a prefix argument, process the entire subtree. When called with
6110 two prefix arguments, or when the cursor is before the first headline,
6111 process the entire buffer.
6114 Remove the overlay preview images.
6117 During HTML export (@pxref{HTML export}), all La@TeX{} fragments are
6118 converted into images and inlined into the document if the following
6122 (setq org-export-with-LaTeX-fragments t)
6125 @node CDLaTeX mode, , Processing LaTeX fragments, Embedded LaTeX
6126 @section Using CDLaTeX to enter math
6129 CDLaTeX-mode is a minor mode that is normally used in combination with a
6130 major La@TeX{} mode like AUCTeX in order to speed-up insertion of
6131 environments and math templates. Inside Org-mode, you can make use of
6132 some of the features of cdlatex-mode. You need to install
6133 @file{cdlatex.el} and @file{texmathp.el} (the latter comes also with
6134 AUCTeX) from @url{http://www.astro.uva.nl/~dominik/Tools/cdlatex}.
6135 Don't turn cdlatex-mode itself under Org-mode, but use the light
6136 version @code{org-cdlatex-mode} that comes as part of Org-mode. Turn it
6137 on for the current buffer with @code{M-x org-cdlatex-mode}, or for all
6141 (add-hook 'org-mode-hook 'turn-on-org-cdlatex)
6144 When this mode is enabled, the following features are present (for more
6145 details see the documentation of cdlatex-mode):
6149 Environment templates can be inserted with @kbd{C-c @{}.
6152 The @key{TAB} key will do template expansion if the cursor is inside a
6153 La@TeX{} fragment@footnote{Org-mode has a method to test if the cursor is
6154 inside such a fragment, see the documentation of the function
6155 @code{org-inside-LaTeX-fragment-p}.}. For example, @key{TAB} will
6156 expand @code{fr} to @code{\frac@{@}@{@}} and position the cursor
6157 correctly inside the first brace. Another @key{TAB} will get you into
6158 the second brace. Even outside fragments, @key{TAB} will expand
6159 environment abbreviations at the beginning of a line. For example, if
6160 you write @samp{equ} at the beginning of a line and press @key{TAB},
6161 this abbreviation will be expanded to an @code{equation} environment.
6162 To get a list of all abbreviations, type @kbd{M-x cdlatex-command-help}.
6166 Pressing @kbd{_} and @kbd{^} inside a La@TeX{} fragment will insert these
6167 characters together with a pair of braces. If you use @key{TAB} to move
6168 out of the braces, and if the braces surround only a single character or
6169 macro, they are removed again (depending on the variable
6170 @code{cdlatex-simplify-sub-super-scripts}).
6173 Pressing the backquote @kbd{`} followed by a character inserts math
6174 macros, also outside La@TeX{} fragments. If you wait more than 1.5 seconds
6175 after the backquote, a help window will pop up.
6178 Pressing the normal quote @kbd{'} followed by another character modifies
6179 the symbol before point with an accent or a font. If you wait more than
6180 1.5 seconds after the backquote, a help window will pop up. Character
6181 modification will work only inside La@TeX{} fragments, outside the quote
6185 @node Exporting, Publishing, Embedded LaTeX, Top
6189 Org-mode documents can be exported into a variety of other formats. For
6190 printing and sharing of notes, ASCII export produces a readable and
6191 simple version of an Org-mode file. HTML export allows you to publish a
6192 notes file on the web, while the XOXO format provides a solid base for
6193 exchange with a broad range of other applications. La@TeX{} export lets
6194 you use Org-mode and its structured editing functions to easily create
6195 La@TeX{} files. To incorporate entries with associated times like
6196 deadlines or appointments into a desktop calendar program like iCal,
6197 Org-mode can also produce extracts in the iCalendar format. Currently
6198 Org-mode only supports export, not import of these different formats.
6200 When exporting, Org-mode uses special conventions to enrich the output
6201 produced. @xref{Text interpretation}, for more details.
6206 Dispatcher for export and publishing commands. Displays a help-window
6207 listing the additional key(s) needed to launch an export or publishing
6212 * ASCII export:: Exporting to plain ASCII
6213 * HTML export:: Exporting to HTML
6214 * LaTeX export:: Exporting to LaTeX
6215 * XOXO export:: Exporting to XOXO
6216 * iCalendar export:: Exporting in iCalendar format
6217 * Text interpretation:: How the exporter looks at the file
6220 @node ASCII export, HTML export, Exporting, Exporting
6221 @section ASCII export
6222 @cindex ASCII export
6224 ASCII export produces a simple and very readable version of an Org-mode
6227 @cindex region, active
6228 @cindex active region
6229 @cindex transient-mark-mode
6233 Export as ASCII file. For an org file @file{myfile.org}, the ASCII file
6234 will be @file{myfile.txt}. The file will be overwritten without
6235 warning. If there is an active region, only the region will be
6236 exported. If the selected region is a single tree, the tree head will
6237 become the document title. If the tree head entry has or inherits an
6238 @code{:EXPORT_FILE_NAME:} property, that name will be used for the
6242 Export only the visible part of the document.
6245 @cindex headline levels, for exporting
6246 In the exported version, the first 3 outline levels will become
6247 headlines, defining a general document structure. Additional levels
6248 will be exported as itemized lists. If you want that transition to occur
6249 at a different level, specify it with a prefix argument. For example,
6256 creates only top level headlines and does the rest as items. When
6257 headlines are converted to items, the indentation of the text following
6258 the headline is changed to fit nicely under the item. This is done with
6259 the assumption that the first bodyline indicates the base indentation of
6260 the body text. Any indentation larger than this is adjusted to preserve
6261 the layout relative to the first line. Should there be lines with less
6262 indentation than the first, these are left alone.
6264 @node HTML export, LaTeX export, ASCII export, Exporting
6265 @section HTML export
6268 Org-mode contains an HTML (XHTML 1.0 strict) exporter with extensive
6269 HTML formatting, in ways similar to John Grubers @emph{markdown}
6270 language, but with additional support for tables.
6273 * HTML Export commands:: How to invoke LaTeX export
6274 * Quoting HTML tags:: Using direct HTML in Org-mode
6275 * Links:: Transformation of links for HTML
6276 * Images:: How to include images
6277 * CSS support:: Changing the appearence of the output
6280 @node HTML Export commands, Quoting HTML tags, HTML export, HTML export
6281 @subsection HTML export commands
6283 @cindex region, active
6284 @cindex active region
6285 @cindex transient-mark-mode
6289 Export as HTML file @file{myfile.html}. For an org file
6290 @file{myfile.org}, the ASCII file will be @file{myfile.html}. The file
6291 will be overwritten without warning. If there is an active region, only
6292 the region will be exported. If the selected region is a single tree,
6293 the tree head will become the document title. If the tree head entry
6294 has or inherits an @code{:EXPORT_FILE_NAME:} property, that name will be
6295 used for the export.
6298 Export as HTML file and immediately open it with a browser.
6301 Export to a temporary buffer, do not create a file.
6304 Export the active region to a temporary buffer. With prefix arg, do not
6305 produce file header and foot, but just the plain HTML section for the
6306 region. This is good for cut-and-paste operations.
6315 Export only the visible part of the document.
6316 @item M-x org-export-region-as-html
6317 Convert the region to HTML under the assumption that it was org-mode
6318 syntax before. This is a global command that can be invoked in any
6320 @item M-x org-replace-region-by-HTML
6321 Replace the active region (assumed to be in Org-mode syntax) by HTML
6325 @cindex headline levels, for exporting
6326 In the exported version, the first 3 outline levels will become
6327 headlines, defining a general document structure. Additional levels
6328 will be exported as itemized lists. If you want that transition to occur
6329 at a different level, specify it with a prefix argument. For example,
6336 creates two levels of headings and does the rest as items.
6338 @node Quoting HTML tags, Links, HTML Export commands, HTML export
6339 @subsection Quoting HTML tags
6341 Plain @samp{<} and @samp{>} are always transformed to @samp{<} and
6342 @samp{>} in HTML export. If you want to include simple HTML tags
6343 which should be interpreted as such, mark them with @samp{@@} as in
6344 @samp{@@<b>bold text@@</b>}. Note that this really works only for
6345 simple tags. For more extensive HTML that should be copied verbatim to
6346 the exported file use either
6349 #+HTML: Literal HTML code for export
6356 All lines between these markers are exported literally
6361 @node Links, Images, Quoting HTML tags, HTML export
6364 @cindex links, in HTML export
6365 @cindex internal links, in HTML export
6366 @cindex external links, in HTML export
6367 Internal links (@pxref{Internal links}) will continue to work in HTML
6368 files only if they match a dedicated @samp{<<target>>}. Automatic links
6369 created by radio targets (@pxref{Radio targets}) will also work in the
6370 HTML file. Links to external files will still work if the HTML file is
6371 in the same directory as the Org-mode file. Links to other @file{.org}
6372 files will be translated into HTML links under the assumption that an
6373 HTML version also exists of the linked file. For information related to
6374 linking files while publishing them to a publishing directory see
6375 @ref{Publishing links}.
6377 @node Images, CSS support, Links, HTML export
6380 @cindex images, inline in HTML
6381 @cindex inlining images in HTML
6382 HTML export can inline images given as links in the Org-mode file, and
6383 it can make an image the clickable part of a link. By
6384 default@footnote{but see the variable
6385 @code{org-export-html-inline-images}}, images are inlined if a link does
6386 not have a description. So @samp{[[file:myimg.jpg]]} will be inlined,
6387 while @samp{[[file:myimg.jpg][the image]]} will just produce a link
6388 @samp{the image} that points to the image. If the description part
6389 itself is a @code{file:} link or a @code{http:} URL pointing to an
6390 image, this image will be inlined and activated so that clicking on the
6391 image will activate the link. For example, to include a thumbnail that
6392 will link to a high resolution version of the image, you could use:
6395 [[file:highres.jpg][file:thumb.jpg]]
6399 and you could use @code{http} addresses just as well.
6401 @node CSS support, , Images, HTML export
6402 @subsection CSS support
6404 You can also give style information for the exported file. The HTML
6405 exporter assigns the following CSS classes to appropriate parts of the
6406 document - your style specifications may change these:
6408 .todo @r{TODO keywords}
6409 .done @r{the DONE keyword}
6410 .timestamp @r{time stamp}
6411 .timestamp-kwd @r{keyword associated with a time stamp, like SCHEDULED}
6412 .tag @r{tag in a headline}
6413 .target @r{target for links}
6416 The default style specification can be configured through the option
6417 @code{org-export-html-style}. If you want to use a file-local style,
6418 you may use file variables, best wrapped into a COMMENT section at the
6419 end of the outline tree. For example@footnote{Under Emacs 21, the
6420 continuation lines for a variable value should have no @samp{#} at the
6421 start of the line.}:
6424 * COMMENT html style specifications
6427 # org-export-html-style: " <style type=\"text/css\">
6428 # p @{font-weight: normal; color: gray; @}
6429 # h1 @{color: black; @}
6434 Remember to execute @kbd{M-x normal-mode} after changing this to make
6435 the new style visible to Emacs. This command restarts org-mode for the
6436 current buffer and forces Emacs to re-evaluate the local variables
6437 section in the buffer.
6439 @c FIXME: More about header and footer styles
6440 @c FIXME: Talk about links and targets.
6442 @node LaTeX export, XOXO export, HTML export, Exporting
6443 @section LaTeX export
6444 @cindex LaTeX export
6446 Org-mode contains a La@TeX{} exporter written by Bastien Guerry.
6449 * LaTeX export commands:: How to invoke LaTeX export
6450 * Quoting LaTeX code:: Incorporating literal LaTeX code
6451 * Sectioning structure::
6454 @node LaTeX export commands, Quoting LaTeX code, LaTeX export, LaTeX export
6455 @subsection LaTeX export commands
6460 Export as La@TeX{} file @file{myfile.tex}.
6463 Export to a temporary buffer, do not create a file.
6468 Export only the visible part of the document.
6469 @item M-x org-export-region-as-latex
6470 Convert the region to La@TeX{} under the assumption that it was org-mode
6471 syntax before. This is a global command that can be invoked in any
6473 @item M-x org-replace-region-by-latex
6474 Replace the active region (assumed to be in Org-mode syntax) by La@TeX{}
6478 @cindex headline levels, for exporting
6479 In the exported version, the first 3 outline levels will become
6480 headlines, defining a general document structure. Additional levels
6481 will be exported as description lists. The exporter can ignore them or
6482 convert them to a custom string depending on
6483 @code{org-latex-low-levels}.
6485 If you want that transition to occur at a different level, specify it
6486 with a prefix argument. For example,
6493 creates two levels of headings and does the rest as items.
6495 @node Quoting LaTeX code, Sectioning structure, LaTeX export commands, LaTeX export
6496 @subsection Quoting LaTeX code
6498 Embedded La@TeX{} as described in @ref{Embedded LaTeX} will be correctly
6499 inserted into the La@TeX{} file. Forthermore, you can add special code
6500 that should only be present in La@TeX{} export with the following
6504 #+LaTeX: Literal LaTeX code for export
6511 All lines between these markers are exported literally
6517 @node Sectioning structure, , Quoting LaTeX code, LaTeX export
6518 @subsection Sectioning structure
6520 @cindex LaTeX sectioning structure
6522 By default, the La@TeX{} output uses the class @code{article}.
6524 You can change this globally by setting a different value for
6525 @code{org-export-latex-default-class} or locally by adding an option
6526 like @code{#+LaTeX_CLASS: myclass} in your file. The class should be
6527 listed in @code{org-export-latex-classes}, where you can also define the
6528 sectioning structure for each class.
6531 @node XOXO export, iCalendar export, LaTeX export, Exporting
6532 @section XOXO export
6535 Org-mode contains an exporter that produces XOXO-style output.
6536 Currently, this exporter only handles the general outline structure and
6537 does not interpret any additional Org-mode features.
6542 Export as XOXO file @file{myfile.html}.
6545 Export only the visible part of the document.
6548 @node iCalendar export, Text interpretation, XOXO export, Exporting
6549 @section iCalendar export
6550 @cindex iCalendar export
6552 Some people like to use Org-mode for keeping track of projects, but
6553 still prefer a standard calendar application for anniversaries and
6554 appointments. In this case it can be useful to have deadlines and
6555 other time-stamped items in Org-mode files show up in the calendar
6556 application. Org-mode can export calendar information in the standard
6557 iCalendar format. If you also want to have TODO entries included in the
6558 export, configure the variable @code{org-icalendar-include-todo}.
6563 Create iCalendar entries for the current file and store them in the same
6564 directory, using a file extension @file{.ics}.
6567 Like @kbd{C-c C-e i}, but do this for all files in
6568 @code{org-agenda-files}. For each of these files, a separate iCalendar
6569 file will be written.
6572 Create a single large iCalendar file from all files in
6573 @code{org-agenda-files} and write it to the file given by
6574 @code{org-combined-agenda-icalendar-file}.
6577 The export will honor SUMMARY, DESCRIPTION and LOCATION properties if
6578 the selected entries have them. If not, the summary will be derived
6579 from the headline, and the description from the body (limited to
6580 @code{org-icalendar-include-body} characters).
6582 How this calendar is best read and updated, depends on the application
6583 you are using. The FAQ covers this issue.
6586 @node Text interpretation, , iCalendar export, Exporting
6587 @section Text interpretation by the exporter
6589 The exporter backends interpret additional structure in the Org-mode file
6590 in order to produce better output.
6593 * Comment lines:: Some lines will not be exported
6594 * Initial text:: Text before the first headline
6595 * Footnotes:: Numbers like [1]
6596 * Quoted examples:: Inserting quoted chnuks of text
6597 * Enhancing text:: Subscripts, symbols and more
6598 * Export options:: How to influence the export settings
6601 @node Comment lines, Initial text, Text interpretation, Text interpretation
6602 @subsection Comment lines
6603 @cindex comment lines
6604 @cindex exporting, not
6606 Lines starting with @samp{#} in column zero are treated as comments
6607 and will never be exported. Also entire subtrees starting with the
6608 word @samp{COMMENT} will never be exported.
6613 Toggle the COMMENT keyword at the beginning of an entry.
6616 @node Initial text, Footnotes, Comment lines, Text interpretation
6617 @subsection Text before the first headline
6619 Org-mode normally ignores any text before the first headline when
6620 exporting, leaving this region for internal links to speed up navigation
6621 etc. However, in publishing-oriented files, you might want to have some
6622 text before the first headline, like a small introduction, special HTML
6623 code with a navigation bar, etc. You can ask to have this part of the
6624 file exported as well by setting the variable
6625 @code{org-export-skip-text-before-1st-heading} to @code{nil}. On a
6626 per-file basis, you can get the same effect with
6632 The text before the first headline will be fully processed
6633 (@pxref{Enhancing text}), and the first non-comment line becomes the
6634 title of the exported document. If you need to include literal HTML,
6635 use the special constructs described in @ref{Quoting HTML tags}. The
6636 table of contents is normally inserted directly before the first
6637 headline of the file. If you would like to get it to a different
6638 location, insert the string @code{[TABLE-OF-CONTENTS]} on a line by
6639 itself at the desired location.
6641 Finally, if you want to use the space before the first headline for
6642 internal purposes, but @emph{still} want to place something before the
6643 first headline when exporting the file, you can use the @code{#+TEXT}
6648 #+TEXT: This text will go before the *first* headline.
6649 #+TEXT: We place the table of contents here:
6650 #+TEXT: [TABLE-OF-CONTENTS]
6651 #+TEXT: This goes between the table of contents and the first headline
6654 @node Footnotes, Quoted examples, Initial text, Text interpretation
6655 @subsection Footnotes
6657 @cindex @file{footnote.el}
6659 Numbers in square brackets are treated as footnotes, so that you can use
6660 the Emacs package @file{footnote.el} to create footnotes. For example:
6663 The org-mode homepage[1] clearly needs help from
6664 a good web designer.
6666 [1] The link is: http://orgmode.org
6671 Note that the @file{footnote} package uses @kbd{C-c !} to invoke its
6672 commands. This binding conflicts with the org-mode command for
6673 inserting inactive time stamps. You could use the variable
6674 @code{footnote-prefix} to switch footnotes commands to another key. Or,
6675 if you are too used to this binding, you could use
6676 @code{org-replace-disputed-keys} and @code{org-disputed-keys} to change
6677 the settings in Org-mode.
6679 @node Quoted examples, Enhancing text, Footnotes, Text interpretation
6680 @subsection Quoted examples
6681 @cindex quoted examples
6682 @cindex examples, quoted
6683 @cindex text, fixed width
6684 @cindex fixed width text
6686 When writing technical documents, you often need to insert examples that
6687 are not further interpreted by Org-mode. For historical reasons, there
6688 are several ways to do this:
6692 If a headline starts with the word @samp{QUOTE}, the text below the
6693 headline will be typeset as fixed-width, to allow quoting of computer
6696 Lines starting with @samp{:} are also typeset in fixed-width font.
6700 Toggle fixed-width for entry (QUOTE) or region, see below.
6703 Finally, text between
6709 will also be exported in this way.
6713 @node Enhancing text, Export options, Quoted examples, Text interpretation
6714 @subsection Enhancing text for export
6715 @cindex enhancing text
6718 Some of the export backends of Org-mode allow for sophisticated text
6719 formatting, this is true in particular for the HTML and La@TeX{}
6720 backends. Org-mode has a number of typing conventions that allow to
6721 produce a richly formatted output.
6725 @cindex hand-formatted lists
6726 @cindex lists, hand-formatted
6728 Plain lists @samp{-}, @samp{*} or @samp{+} as bullet, or with @samp{1.}
6729 or @samp{2)} as enumerator will be recognized and transformed if the
6730 backend supports lists. See @xref{Plain lists}.
6732 @cindex underlined text
6735 @cindex verbatim text
6737 You can make words @b{*bold*}, @i{/italic/}, _underlined_, @code{=code=}
6738 and @code{~verbatim~}, and, if you must, @samp{+strikethrough+}. Text
6739 in the code and verbatim string is not processed for org-mode specific
6740 syntax, it is exported verbatim.
6742 @cindex horizontal rules, in exported files
6744 A line consisting of only dashes, and at least 5 of them, will be
6745 exported as a horizontal line (@samp{<hr/>} in HTML).
6747 @cindex LaTeX fragments, export
6748 @cindex TeX macros, export
6750 Many @TeX{} macros and entire La@TeX{} fragments are converted into HTML
6751 entities or images (@pxref{Embedded LaTeX}).
6753 @cindex tables, export
6755 Tables are transformed into native tables under the exporter, if the
6756 export backend supports this. Data fields before the first horizontal
6757 separator line will be formatted as table header fields.
6761 If a headline starts with the word @samp{QUOTE}, the text below the
6762 headline will be typeset as fixed-width, to allow quoting of computer
6763 codes etc. Lines starting with @samp{:} are also typeset in fixed-width
6768 Toggle fixed-width for entry (QUOTE) or region, see below.
6770 Finally, text between
6776 will also be exported in this way.
6778 @cindex linebreak, forced
6780 A double backslash @emph{at the end of a line} enforces a line break at
6783 @cindex HTML entities, LaTeX entities
6785 Strings like @code{\alpha} will be exported as @code{α}, in the
6786 HTML output. These strings are exported as @code{$\alpha$} in the
6787 La@TeX{} output. Similarly, @code{\nbsp} will become @code{ } in
6788 HTML and in La@TeX{}. This applies for a long list of entities, see
6789 the variable @code{org-html-entities} for the complete list.
6793 If these conversions conflict with your habits of typing ASCII text,
6794 they can all be turned off with corresponding variables. See the
6795 customization group @code{org-export-general}, and the following section
6796 which explains how to set export options with special lines in a
6800 @node Export options, , Enhancing text, Text interpretation
6801 @subsection Export options
6802 @cindex options, for export
6804 @cindex completion, of option keywords
6805 The exporter recognizes special lines in the buffer which provide
6806 additional information. These lines may be put anywhere in the file.
6807 The whole set of lines can be inserted into the buffer with @kbd{C-c
6808 C-e t}. For individual lines, a good way to make sure the keyword is
6809 correct is to type @samp{#+} and then use @kbd{M-@key{TAB}} completion
6810 (@pxref{Completion}).
6815 Insert template with export options, see example below.
6819 #+TITLE: the title to be shown (default is the buffer name)
6820 #+AUTHOR: the author (default taken from @code{user-full-name})
6821 #+DATE: A date, fixed, of a format string for @code{format-time-string}
6822 #+EMAIL: his/her email address (default from @code{user-mail-address})
6823 #+LANGUAGE: language for HTML, e.g. @samp{en} (@code{org-export-default-language})
6824 #+TEXT: Some descriptive text to be inserted at the beginning.
6825 #+TEXT: Several lines may be given.
6826 #+OPTIONS: H:2 num:t toc:t \n:nil @@:t ::t |:t ^:t f:t TeX:t ...
6830 The OPTIONS line is a compact form to specify export settings. Here
6832 @cindex headline levels
6833 @cindex section-numbers
6834 @cindex table of contents
6835 @cindex linebreak preservation
6836 @cindex quoted HTML tags
6837 @cindex fixed-width sections
6839 @cindex @TeX{}-like syntax for sub- and superscripts
6841 @cindex special strings
6842 @cindex emphasized text
6843 @cindex @TeX{} macros
6844 @cindex La@TeX{} fragments
6845 @cindex author info, in export
6846 @cindex time info, in export
6848 H: @r{set the number of headline levels for export}
6849 num: @r{turn on/off section-numbers}
6850 toc: @r{turn on/off table of contents, or set level limit (integer)}
6851 \n: @r{turn on/off linebreak-preservation}
6852 @@: @r{turn on/off quoted HTML tags}
6853 :: @r{turn on/off fixed-width sections}
6854 |: @r{turn on/off tables}
6855 ^: @r{turn on/off @TeX{}-like syntax for sub- and superscripts. If}
6856 @r{you write "^:@{@}", @code{a_@{b@}} will be interpreted, but}
6857 @r{the simple @code{a_b} will be left as it is.}
6858 -: @r{turn on/off conversion of special strings.}
6859 f: @r{turn on/off foototes like this[1].}
6860 *: @r{turn on/off emphasized text (bold, italic, underlined)}
6861 TeX: @r{turn on/off simple @TeX{} macros in plain text}
6862 LaTeX: @r{turn on/off La@TeX{} fragments}
6863 skip: @r{turn on/off skipping the text before the first heading}
6864 author: @r{turn on/off inclusion of author name/email into exported file}
6865 timestamp: @r{turn on/off inclusion creation time into exported file}
6866 d: @r{turn on/off inclusion of drawers}
6869 These options take effect in both the HTML and La@TeX{} export, except
6870 for @code{TeX} and @code{LaTeX}, which are respectively @code{t} and
6871 @code{nil} for the La@TeX{} export.
6873 @node Publishing, Miscellaneous, Exporting, Top
6877 Org-mode includes@footnote{@file{org-publish.el} is not distributed with
6878 Emacs 21, if you are still using Emacs 21, you need you need to download
6879 this file separately.} a publishing management system that allows you to
6880 configure automatic HTML conversion of @emph{projects} composed of
6881 interlinked org files. This system is called @emph{org-publish}. You can
6882 also configure org-publish to automatically upload your exported HTML
6883 pages and related attachments, such as images and source code files, to
6884 a web server. Org-publish turns org-mode into a web-site authoring tool.
6886 You can also use Org-publish to convert files into La@TeX{}, or even
6887 combine HTML and La@TeX{} conversion so that files are available in both
6888 formats on the server@footnote{Since La@TeX{} files on a server are not
6889 that helpful, you surely want to perform further conversion on them --
6890 e.g. convert them to @code{PDF} format.}.
6892 Org-publish has been contributed to Org-mode by David O'Toole.
6895 * Configuration:: Defining projects
6896 * Sample configuration:: Example projects
6897 * Triggering publication:: Publication commands
6900 @node Configuration, Sample configuration, Publishing, Publishing
6901 @section Configuration
6903 Publishing needs significant configuration to specify files, destination
6904 and many other properties of a project.
6907 * Project alist:: The central configuration variable
6908 * Sources and destinations:: From here to there
6909 * Selecting files:: What files are part of the project?
6910 * Publishing action:: Setting the function doing the publishing
6911 * Publishing options:: Tweaking HTML export
6912 * Publishing links:: Which links keep working after publishing?
6913 * Project page index:: Publishing a list of project files
6916 @node Project alist, Sources and destinations, Configuration, Configuration
6917 @subsection The variable @code{org-publish-project-alist}
6918 @cindex org-publish-project-alist
6919 @cindex projects, for publishing
6921 Org-publish is configured almost entirely through setting the value of
6922 one variable, called @code{org-publish-project-alist}.
6923 Each element of the list configures one project, and may be in one of
6924 the two following forms:
6927 ("project-name" :property value :property value ...)
6931 ("project-name" :components ("project-name" "project-name" ...))
6935 In both cases, projects are configured by specifying property values.
6936 A project defines the set of files that will be published, as well as
6937 the publishing configuration to use when publishing those files. When
6938 a project takes the second form listed above, the individual members
6939 of the ``components'' property are taken to be components of the
6940 project, which group together files requiring different publishing
6941 options. When you publish such a ``meta-project'' all the components
6944 @node Sources and destinations, Selecting files, Project alist, Configuration
6945 @subsection Sources and destinations for files
6946 @cindex directories, for publishing
6948 Most properties are optional, but some should always be set. In
6949 particular, org-publish needs to know where to look for source files,
6950 and where to put published files.
6952 @multitable @columnfractions 0.3 0.7
6953 @item @code{:base-directory}
6954 @tab Directory containing publishing source files
6955 @item @code{:publishing-directory}
6956 @tab Directory (possibly remote) where output files will be published.
6957 @item @code{:preparation-function}
6958 @tab Function called before starting publishing process, for example to
6959 run @code{make} for updating files to be published.
6963 @node Selecting files, Publishing action, Sources and destinations, Configuration
6964 @subsection Selecting files
6965 @cindex files, selecting for publishing
6967 By default, all files with extension @file{.org} in the base directory
6968 are considered part of the project. This can be modified by setting the
6970 @multitable @columnfractions 0.25 0.75
6971 @item @code{:base-extension}
6972 @tab Extension (without the dot!) of source files. This actually is a
6975 @item @code{:exclude}
6976 @tab Regular expression to match file names that should not be
6977 published, even though they have been selected on the basis of their
6980 @item @code{:include}
6981 @tab List of files to be included regardless of @code{:base-extension}
6982 and @code{:exclude}.
6985 @node Publishing action, Publishing options, Selecting files, Configuration
6986 @subsection Publishing Action
6987 @cindex action, for publishing
6989 Publishing means that a file is copied to the destination directory and
6990 possibly transformed in the process. The default transformation is to
6991 export Org-mode files as HTML files, and this is done by the function
6992 @code{org-publish-org-to-html} which calls the HTML exporter
6993 (@pxref{HTML export}). But you also can publish your files in La@TeX{} by
6994 using the function @code{org-publish-org-to-latex} instead. Other files
6995 like images only need to be copied to the publishing destination. For
6996 non-Org-mode files, you need to specify the publishing function.
6999 @multitable @columnfractions 0.3 0.7
7000 @item @code{:publishing-function}
7001 @tab Function executing the publication of a file. This may also be a
7002 list of functions, which will all be called in turn.
7005 The function must accept two arguments: a property list containing at
7006 least a @code{:publishing-directory} property, and the name of the file
7007 to be published. It should take the specified file, make the necessary
7008 transformation (if any) and place the result into the destination folder.
7009 You can write your own publishing function, but @code{org-publish}
7010 provides one for attachments (files that only need to be copied):
7011 @code{org-publish-attachment}.
7013 @node Publishing options, Publishing links, Publishing action, Configuration
7014 @subsection Options for the HTML/LaTeX exporters
7015 @cindex options, for publishing
7017 The property list can be used to set many export options for the HTML
7018 and La@TeX{} exporters. In most cases, these properties correspond to user
7019 variables in Org-mode. The table below lists these properties along
7020 with the variable they belong to. See the documentation string for the
7021 respective variable for details.
7023 @multitable @columnfractions 0.3 0.7
7024 @item @code{:language} @tab @code{org-export-default-language}
7025 @item @code{:headline-levels} @tab @code{org-export-headline-levels}
7026 @item @code{:section-numbers} @tab @code{org-export-with-section-numbers}
7027 @item @code{:table-of-contents} @tab @code{org-export-with-toc}
7028 @item @code{:archived-trees} @tab @code{org-export-with-archived-trees}
7029 @item @code{:emphasize} @tab @code{org-export-with-emphasize}
7030 @item @code{:sub-superscript} @tab @code{org-export-with-sub-superscripts}
7031 @item @code{:special-strings} @tab @code{org-export-with-special-strings}
7032 @item @code{:TeX-macros} @tab @code{org-export-with-TeX-macros}
7033 @item @code{:LaTeX-fragments} @tab @code{org-export-with-LaTeX-fragments}
7034 @item @code{:fixed-width} @tab @code{org-export-with-fixed-width}
7035 @item @code{:timestamps} .@tab @code{org-export-with-timestamps}
7036 @item @code{:tags} .@tab @code{org-export-with-tags}
7037 @item @code{:tables} @tab @code{org-export-with-tables}
7038 @item @code{:table-auto-headline} @tab @code{org-export-highlight-first-table-line}
7039 @item @code{:style} @tab @code{org-export-html-style}
7040 @item @code{:convert-org-links} @tab @code{org-export-html-link-org-files-as-html}
7041 @item @code{:inline-images} @tab @code{org-export-html-inline-images}
7042 @item @code{:expand-quoted-html} @tab @code{org-export-html-expand}
7043 @item @code{:timestamp} @tab @code{org-export-html-with-timestamp}
7044 @item @code{:publishing-directory} @tab @code{org-export-publishing-directory}
7045 @item @code{:preamble} @tab @code{org-export-html-preamble}
7046 @item @code{:postamble} @tab @code{org-export-html-postamble}
7047 @item @code{:auto-preamble} @tab @code{org-export-html-auto-preamble}
7048 @item @code{:auto-postamble} @tab @code{org-export-html-auto-postamble}
7049 @item @code{:author} @tab @code{user-full-name}
7050 @item @code{:email} @tab @code{user-mail-address}
7053 If you use several email addresses, separate them by a semi-column.
7055 Most of the @code{org-export-with-*} variables have the same effect in
7056 both HTML and La@TeX{} exporters, except for @code{:TeX-macros} and
7057 @code{:LaTeX-fragments}, respectively @code{nil} and @code{t} in the
7060 When a property is given a value in @code{org-publish-project-alist},
7061 its setting overrides the value of the corresponding user variable (if
7062 any) during publishing. Options set within a file (@pxref{Export
7063 options}), however, override everything.
7065 @node Publishing links, Project page index, Publishing options, Configuration
7066 @subsection Links between published files
7067 @cindex links, publishing
7069 To create a link from one Org-mode file to another, you would use
7070 something like @samp{[[file:foo.org][The foo]]} or simply
7071 @samp{file:foo.org.} (@pxref{Hyperlinks}). Upon publishing this link
7072 becomes a link to @file{foo.html}. In this way, you can interlink the
7073 pages of your "org web" project and the links will work as expected when
7074 you publish them to HTML.
7076 You may also link to related files, such as images. Provided you are
7077 careful with relative pathnames, and provided you have also configured
7078 @code{org-publish} to upload the related files, these links will work
7079 too. @ref{Complex example} for an example of this usage.
7081 Sometime an Org-mode file to be published may contain links that are
7082 only valid in your production environment, but not in the publishing
7083 location. In this case, use the property
7085 @multitable @columnfractions 0.4 0.6
7086 @item @code{:link-validation-function}
7087 @tab Function to validate links
7091 to define a function for checking link validity. This function must
7092 accept two arguments, the file name and a directory relative to which
7093 the file name is interpreted in the production environment. If this
7094 function returns @code{nil}, then the HTML generator will only insert a
7095 description into the HTML file, but no link. One option for this
7096 function is @code{org-publish-validate-link} which checks if the given
7097 file is part of any project in @code{org-publish-project-alist}.
7099 @node Project page index, , Publishing links, Configuration
7100 @subsection Project page index
7101 @cindex index, of published pages
7103 The following properties may be used to control publishing of an
7104 index of files or summary page for a given project.
7106 @multitable @columnfractions 0.25 0.75
7107 @item @code{:auto-index}
7108 @tab When non-nil, publish an index during org-publish-current-project or
7111 @item @code{:index-filename}
7112 @tab Filename for output of index. Defaults to @file{index.org} (which
7113 becomes @file{index.html}).
7115 @item @code{:index-title}
7116 @tab Title of index page. Defaults to name of file.
7118 @item @code{:index-function}
7119 @tab Plugin function to use for generation of index.
7120 Defaults to @code{org-publish-org-index}, which generates a plain list
7121 of links to all files in the project.
7124 @node Sample configuration, Triggering publication, Configuration, Publishing
7125 @section Sample configuration
7127 Below we provide two example configurations. The first one is a simple
7128 project publishing only a set of Org-mode files. The second example is
7129 more complex, with a multi-component project.
7132 * Simple example:: One-component publishing
7133 * Complex example:: A multi-component publishing example
7136 @node Simple example, Complex example, Sample configuration, Sample configuration
7137 @subsection Example: simple publishing configuration
7139 This example publishes a set of Org-mode files to the @file{public_html}
7140 directory on the local machine.
7143 (setq org-publish-project-alist
7145 :base-directory "~/org/"
7146 :publishing-directory "~/public_html"
7147 :section-numbers nil
7148 :table-of-contents nil
7149 :style "<link rel=stylesheet
7150 href=\"../other/mystyle.css\"
7151 type=\"text/css\">")))
7154 @node Complex example, , Simple example, Sample configuration
7155 @subsection Example: complex publishing configuration
7157 This more complicated example publishes an entire website, including
7158 org files converted to HTML, image files, emacs lisp source code, and
7159 stylesheets. The publishing-directory is remote and private files are
7162 To ensure that links are preserved, care should be taken to replicate
7163 your directory structure on the web server, and to use relative file
7164 paths. For example, if your org files are kept in @file{~/org} and your
7165 publishable images in @file{~/images}, you'd link to an image with
7168 file:../images/myimage.png
7171 On the web server, the relative path to the image should be the
7172 same. You can accomplish this by setting up an "images" folder in the
7173 right place on the webserver, and publishing images to it.
7176 (setq org-publish-project-alist
7178 :base-directory "~/org/"
7179 :base-extension "org"
7180 :publishing-directory "/ssh:user@@host:~/html/notebook/"
7181 :publishing-function org-publish-org-to-html
7182 :exclude "PrivatePage.org" ;; regexp
7184 :section-numbers nil
7185 :table-of-contents nil
7186 :style "<link rel=stylesheet
7187 href=\"../other/mystyle.css\" type=\"text/css\">"
7189 :auto-postamble nil)
7192 :base-directory "~/images/"
7193 :base-extension "jpg\\|gif\\|png"
7194 :publishing-directory "/ssh:user@@host:~/html/images/"
7195 :publishing-function org-publish-attachment)
7198 :base-directory "~/other/"
7199 :base-extension "css\\|el"
7200 :publishing-directory "/ssh:user@@host:~/html/other/"
7201 :publishing-function org-publish-attachment)
7202 ("website" :components ("orgfiles" "images" "other"))))
7205 @node Triggering publication, , Sample configuration, Publishing
7206 @section Triggering publication
7208 Once org-publish is properly configured, you can publish with the
7209 following functions:
7213 Prompt for a specific project and publish all files that belong to it.
7215 Publish the project containing the current file.
7217 Publish only the current file.
7219 Publish all projects.
7222 Org uses timestamps to track when a file has changed. The above
7223 functions normally only publish changed files. You can override this and
7224 force publishing of all files by giving a prefix argument.
7226 @node Miscellaneous, Extensions and Hacking, Publishing, Top
7227 @chapter Miscellaneous
7230 * Completion:: M-TAB knows what you need
7231 * Customization:: Adapting Org-mode to your taste
7232 * In-buffer settings:: Overview of the #+KEYWORDS
7233 * The very busy C-c C-c key:: When in doubt, press C-c C-c
7234 * Clean view:: Getting rid of leading stars in the outline
7235 * TTY keys:: Using Org-mode on a tty
7236 * Interaction:: Other Emacs packages
7237 * Bugs:: Things which do not work perfectly
7240 @node Completion, Customization, Miscellaneous, Miscellaneous
7242 @cindex completion, of @TeX{} symbols
7243 @cindex completion, of TODO keywords
7244 @cindex completion, of dictionary words
7245 @cindex completion, of option keywords
7246 @cindex completion, of tags
7247 @cindex completion, of property keys
7248 @cindex completion, of link abbreviations
7249 @cindex @TeX{} symbol completion
7250 @cindex TODO keywords completion
7251 @cindex dictionary word completion
7252 @cindex option keyword completion
7253 @cindex tag completion
7254 @cindex link abbreviations, completion of
7256 Org-mode supports in-buffer completion. This type of completion does
7257 not make use of the minibuffer. You simply type a few letters into
7258 the buffer and use the key to complete text right there.
7263 Complete word at point
7266 At the beginning of a headline, complete TODO keywords.
7268 After @samp{\}, complete @TeX{} symbols supported by the exporter.
7270 After @samp{*}, complete headlines in the current buffer so that they
7271 can be used in search links like @samp{[[*find this headline]]}.
7273 After @samp{:} in a headline, complete tags. The list of tags is taken
7274 from the variable @code{org-tag-alist} (possibly set through the
7275 @samp{#+TAGS} in-buffer option, @pxref{Setting tags}), or it is created
7276 dynamically from all tags used in the current buffer.
7278 After @samp{:} and not in a headline, complete property keys. The list
7279 of keys is constructed dynamically from all keys used in the current
7282 After @samp{[}, complete link abbreviations (@pxref{Link abbreviations}).
7284 After @samp{#+}, complete the special keywords like @samp{TYP_TODO} or
7285 @samp{OPTIONS} which set file-specific options for Org-mode. When the
7286 option keyword is already complete, pressing @kbd{M-@key{TAB}} again
7287 will insert example settings for this keyword.
7289 In the line after @samp{#+STARTUP: }, complete startup keywords,
7290 i.e. valid keys for this line.
7292 Elsewhere, complete dictionary words using ispell.
7296 @node Customization, In-buffer settings, Completion, Miscellaneous
7297 @section Customization
7298 @cindex customization
7299 @cindex options, for customization
7300 @cindex variables, for customization
7302 There are more than 180 variables that can be used to customize
7303 Org-mode. For the sake of compactness of the manual, I am not
7304 describing the variables here. A structured overview of customization
7305 variables is available with @kbd{M-x org-customize}. Or select
7306 @code{Browse Org Group} from the @code{Org->Customization} menu. Many
7307 settings can also be activated on a per-file basis, by putting special
7308 lines into the buffer (@pxref{In-buffer settings}).
7310 @node In-buffer settings, The very busy C-c C-c key, Customization, Miscellaneous
7311 @section Summary of in-buffer settings
7312 @cindex in-buffer settings
7313 @cindex special keywords
7315 Org-mode uses special lines in the buffer to define settings on a
7316 per-file basis. These lines start with a @samp{#+} followed by a
7317 keyword, a colon, and then individual words defining a setting. Several
7318 setting words can be in the same line, but you can also have multiple
7319 lines for the keyword. While these settings are described throughout
7320 the manual, here is a summary. After changing any of those lines in the
7321 buffer, press @kbd{C-c C-c} with the cursor still in the line to
7322 activate the changes immediately. Otherwise they become effective only
7323 when the file is visited again in a new Emacs session.
7326 @item #+ARCHIVE: %s_done::
7327 This line sets the archive location for the agenda file. It applies for
7328 all subsequent lines until the next @samp{#+ARCHIVE} line, or the end
7329 of the file. The first such line also applies to any entries before it.
7330 The corresponding variable is @code{org-archive-location}.
7332 This line sets the category for the agenda file. The category applies
7333 for all subsequent lines until the next @samp{#+CATEGORY} line, or the
7334 end of the file. The first such line also applies to any entries before it.
7335 @item #+COLUMNS: %25ITEM .....
7336 Set the default format for columns view. This format applies when
7337 columns view is invoked in location where no @code{COLUMNS} property
7339 @item #+CONSTANTS: name1=value1 ...
7340 Set file-local values for constants to be used in table formulas. This
7341 line set the local variable @code{org-table-formula-constants-local}.
7342 The global version of this variable is
7343 @code{org-table-formula-constants}.
7344 @item #+DRAWERS: NAME1 .....
7345 Set the file-local set of drawers. The corresponding global variable is
7347 @item #+LINK: linkword replace
7348 These lines (several are allowed) specify link abbreviations.
7349 @xref{Link abbreviations}. The corresponding variable is
7350 @code{org-link-abbrev-alist}.
7351 @item #+PRIORITIES: highest lowest default
7352 This line sets the limits and the default for the priorities. All three
7353 must be either letters A-Z or numbers 0-9. The highest priority must
7354 have a lower ASCII number that the lowest priority.
7355 @item #+PROPERTY: Property_Name Value
7356 This line sets a default inheritance value for entries in the current
7357 buffer, most useful for specifying the allowed values of a property.
7359 This line sets options to be used at startup of Org-mode, when an
7360 Org-mode file is being visited. The first set of options deals with the
7361 initial visibility of the outline tree. The corresponding variable for
7362 global default settings is @code{org-startup-folded}, with a default
7363 value @code{t}, which means @code{overview}.
7364 @cindex @code{overview}, STARTUP keyword
7365 @cindex @code{content}, STARTUP keyword
7366 @cindex @code{showall}, STARTUP keyword
7368 overview @r{top-level headlines only}
7369 content @r{all headlines}
7370 showall @r{no folding at all, show everything}
7372 Then there are options for aligning tables upon visiting a file. This
7373 is useful in files containing narrowed table columns. The corresponding
7374 variable is @code{org-startup-align-all-tables}, with a default value
7376 @cindex @code{align}, STARTUP keyword
7377 @cindex @code{noalign}, STARTUP keyword
7379 align @r{align all tables}
7380 noalign @r{don't align tables on startup}
7382 Logging closing and reinstating TODO items, and clock intervals
7383 (variables @code{org-log-done}, @code{org-log-note-clock-out}, and
7384 @code{org-log-repeat}) can be configured using these options.
7385 @cindex @code{logdone}, STARTUP keyword
7386 @cindex @code{lognotedone}, STARTUP keyword
7387 @cindex @code{nologdone}, STARTUP keyword
7388 @cindex @code{lognoteclock-out}, STARTUP keyword
7389 @cindex @code{nolognoteclock-out}, STARTUP keyword
7390 @cindex @code{logrepeat}, STARTUP keyword
7391 @cindex @code{lognoterepeat}, STARTUP keyword
7392 @cindex @code{nologrepeat}, STARTUP keyword
7394 logdone @r{record a timestamp when an item is marked DONE}
7395 lognotedone @r{record timestamp and a note when DONE}
7396 nologdone @r{don't record when items are marked DONE}
7397 logrepeat @r{record a time when reinstating a repeating item}
7398 lognoterepeat @r{record a note when reinstating a repeating item}
7399 nologrepeat @r{do not record when reinstating repeating item}
7400 lognoteclock-out @r{record a note when clocking out}
7401 nolognoteclock-out @r{don't record a note when clocking out}
7403 Here are the options for hiding leading stars in outline headings. The
7404 corresponding variables are @code{org-hide-leading-stars} and
7405 @code{org-odd-levels-only}, both with a default setting @code{nil}
7406 (meaning @code{showstars} and @code{oddeven}).
7407 @cindex @code{hidestars}, STARTUP keyword
7408 @cindex @code{showstars}, STARTUP keyword
7409 @cindex @code{odd}, STARTUP keyword
7410 @cindex @code{even}, STARTUP keyword
7412 hidestars @r{make all but one of the stars starting a headline invisible.}
7413 showstars @r{show all stars starting a headline}
7414 odd @r{allow only odd outline levels (1,3,...)}
7415 oddeven @r{allow all outline levels}
7417 To turn on custom format overlays over time stamps (variables
7418 @code{org-put-time-stamp-overlays} and
7419 @code{org-time-stamp-overlay-formats}), use
7420 @cindex @code{customtime}, STARTUP keyword
7422 customtime @r{overlay custom time format}
7424 The following options influence the table spreadsheet (variable
7425 @code{constants-unit-system}).
7426 @cindex @code{constcgs}, STARTUP keyword
7427 @cindex @code{constSI}, STARTUP keyword
7429 constcgs @r{@file{constants.el} should use the c-g-s unit system}
7430 constSI @r{@file{constants.el} should use the SI unit system}
7432 @item #+TAGS: TAG1(c1) TAG2(c2)
7433 These lines (several such lines are allowed) specify the valid tags in
7434 this file, and (potentially) the corresponding @emph{fast tag selection}
7435 keys. The corresponding variable is @code{org-tag-alist}.
7437 This line contains the formulas for the table directly above the line.
7438 @item #+TITLE:, #+AUTHOR:, #+EMAIL:, #+LANGUAGE:, #+TEXT:, #+OPTIONS, #+DATE:
7439 These lines provide settings for exporting files. For more details see
7440 @ref{Export options}.
7441 @item #+SEQ_TODO: #+TYP_TODO:
7442 These lines set the TODO keywords and their interpretation in the
7443 current file. The corresponding variables are @code{org-todo-keywords}
7444 and @code{org-todo-interpretation}.
7447 @node The very busy C-c C-c key, Clean view, In-buffer settings, Miscellaneous
7448 @section The very busy C-c C-c key
7450 @cindex C-c C-c, overview
7452 The key @kbd{C-c C-c} has many purposes in org-mode, which are all
7453 mentioned scattered throughout this manual. One specific function of
7454 this key is to add @emph{tags} to a headline (@pxref{Tags}). In many
7455 other circumstances it means something like @emph{Hey Org-mode, look
7456 here and update according to what you see here}. Here is a summary of
7457 what this means in different contexts.
7461 If there are highlights in the buffer from the creation of a sparse
7462 tree, or from clock display, remove these highlights.
7464 If the cursor is in one of the special @code{#+KEYWORD} lines, this
7465 triggers scanning the buffer for these lines and updating the
7468 If the cursor is inside a table, realign the table. This command
7469 works even if the automatic table editor has been turned off.
7471 If the cursor is on a @code{#+TBLFM} line, re-apply the formulas to
7474 If the cursor is inside a table created by the @file{table.el} package,
7475 activate that table.
7477 If the current buffer is a remember buffer, close the note and file it.
7478 With a prefix argument, file it, without further interaction, to the
7481 If the cursor is on a @code{<<<target>>>}, update radio targets and
7482 corresponding links in this buffer.
7484 If the cursor is in a property line or at the start or end of a property
7485 drawer, offer property commands.
7487 If the cursor is in a plain list item with a checkbox, toggle the status
7490 If the cursor is on a numbered item in a plain list, renumber the
7493 If the cursor is on the @code{#+BEGIN} line of a dynamical block, the
7497 @node Clean view, TTY keys, The very busy C-c C-c key, Miscellaneous
7498 @section A cleaner outline view
7499 @cindex hiding leading stars
7500 @cindex clean outline view
7502 Some people find it noisy and distracting that the Org-mode headlines
7503 are starting with a potentially large number of stars. For example
7504 the tree from @ref{Headlines}:
7507 * Top level headline
7513 * Another top level headline
7517 Unfortunately this is deeply ingrained into the code of Org-mode and
7518 cannot be easily changed. You can, however, modify the display in such
7519 a way that all leading stars become invisible and the outline more easy
7520 to read. To do this, customize the variable
7521 @code{org-hide-leading-stars} like this:
7524 (setq org-hide-leading-stars t)
7528 or change this on a per-file basis with one of the lines (anywhere in
7532 #+STARTUP: showstars
7533 #+STARTUP: hidestars
7537 Press @kbd{C-c C-c} with the cursor in a @samp{STARTUP} line to activate
7540 With stars hidden, the tree becomes:
7543 * Top level headline
7549 * Another top level headline
7553 Note that the leading stars are not truly replaced by whitespace, they
7554 are only fontified with the face @code{org-hide} that uses the
7555 background color as font color. If you are not using either white or
7556 black background, you may have to customize this face to get the wanted
7557 effect. Another possibility is to set this font such that the extra
7558 stars are @i{almost} invisible, for example using the color
7559 @code{grey90} on a white background.
7561 Things become cleaner still if you skip all the even levels and use only
7562 odd levels 1, 3, 5..., effectively adding two stars to go from one
7563 outline level to the next:
7566 * Top level headline
7572 * Another top level headline
7576 In order to make the structure editing and export commands handle this
7577 convention correctly, use
7580 (setq org-odd-levels-only t)
7584 or set this on a per-file basis with one of the following lines (don't
7585 forget to press @kbd{C-c C-c} with the cursor in the startup line to
7586 activate changes immediately).
7593 You can convert an Org-mode file from single-star-per-level to the
7594 double-star-per-level convention with @kbd{M-x org-convert-to-odd-levels
7595 RET} in that file. The reverse operation is @kbd{M-x
7596 org-convert-to-oddeven-levels}.
7598 @node TTY keys, Interaction, Clean view, Miscellaneous
7599 @section Using org-mode on a tty
7600 @cindex tty keybindings
7602 Because Org-mode contains a large number of commands, by default much of
7603 Org-mode's core commands are bound to keys that are generally not
7604 accessible on a tty, such as the cursor keys (@key{left}, @key{right},
7605 @key{up}, @key{down}), @key{TAB} and @key{RET}, in particular when used
7606 together with modifiers like @key{Meta} and/or @key{Shift}. To access
7607 these commands on a tty when special keys are unavailable, the following
7608 alternative bindings can be used. The tty bindings below will likely be
7609 more cumbersome; you may find for some of the bindings below that a
7610 customized work-around suits you better. For example, changing a time
7611 stamp is really only fun with @kbd{S-@key{cursor}} keys, whereas on a
7612 tty you would rather use @kbd{C-c .} to re-insert the timestamp.
7614 @multitable @columnfractions 0.15 0.2 0.2
7615 @item @b{Default} @tab @b{Alternative 1} @tab @b{Alternative 2}
7616 @item @kbd{S-@key{TAB}} @tab @kbd{C-u @key{TAB}} @tab
7617 @item @kbd{M-@key{left}} @tab @kbd{C-c C-x l} @tab @kbd{@key{Esc} @key{left}}
7618 @item @kbd{M-S-@key{left}} @tab @kbd{C-c C-x L} @tab
7619 @item @kbd{M-@key{right}} @tab @kbd{C-c C-x r} @tab @kbd{@key{Esc} @key{right}}
7620 @item @kbd{M-S-@key{right}} @tab @kbd{C-c C-x R} @tab
7621 @item @kbd{M-@key{up}} @tab @kbd{C-c C-x u} @tab @kbd{@key{Esc} @key{up}}
7622 @item @kbd{M-S-@key{up}} @tab @kbd{C-c C-x U} @tab
7623 @item @kbd{M-@key{down}} @tab @kbd{C-c C-x d} @tab @kbd{@key{Esc} @key{down}}
7624 @item @kbd{M-S-@key{down}} @tab @kbd{C-c C-x D} @tab
7625 @item @kbd{S-@key{RET}} @tab @kbd{C-c C-x c} @tab
7626 @item @kbd{M-@key{RET}} @tab @kbd{C-c C-x m} @tab @kbd{@key{Esc} @key{RET}}
7627 @item @kbd{M-S-@key{RET}} @tab @kbd{C-c C-x M} @tab
7628 @item @kbd{S-@key{left}} @tab @kbd{C-c @key{left}} @tab
7629 @item @kbd{S-@key{right}} @tab @kbd{C-c @key{right}} @tab
7630 @item @kbd{S-@key{up}} @tab @kbd{C-c @key{up}} @tab
7631 @item @kbd{S-@key{down}} @tab @kbd{C-c @key{down}} @tab
7632 @item @kbd{C-S-@key{left}} @tab @kbd{C-c C-x @key{left}} @tab
7633 @item @kbd{C-S-@key{right}} @tab @kbd{C-c C-x @key{right}} @tab
7636 @node Interaction, Bugs, TTY keys, Miscellaneous
7637 @section Interaction with other packages
7638 @cindex packages, interaction with other
7639 Org-mode lives in the world of GNU Emacs and interacts in various ways
7640 with other code out there.
7643 * Cooperation:: Packages Org-mode cooperates with
7644 * Conflicts:: Packages that lead to conflicts
7647 @node Cooperation, Conflicts, Interaction, Interaction
7648 @subsection Packages that Org-mode cooperates with
7651 @cindex @file{calc.el}
7652 @item @file{calc.el} by Dave Gillespie
7653 Org-mode uses the calc package for implementing spreadsheet
7654 functionality in its tables (@pxref{The spreadsheet}). Org-mode
7655 checks for the availability of calc by looking for the function
7656 @code{calc-eval} which should be autoloaded in your setup if calc has
7657 been installed properly. As of Emacs 22, calc is part of the Emacs
7658 distribution. Another possibility for interaction between the two
7659 packages is using calc for embedded calculations. @xref{Embedded Mode,
7660 , Embedded Mode, calc, GNU Emacs Calc Manual}.
7661 @cindex @file{constants.el}
7662 @item @file{constants.el} by Carsten Dominik
7663 In a table formula (@pxref{The spreadsheet}), it is possible to use
7664 names for natural constants or units. Instead of defining your own
7665 constants in the variable @code{org-table-formula-constants}, install
7666 the @file{constants} package which defines a large number of constants
7667 and units, and lets you use unit prefixes like @samp{M} for
7668 @samp{Mega} etc. You will need version 2.0 of this package, available
7669 at @url{http://www.astro.uva.nl/~dominik/Tools}. Org-mode checks for
7670 the function @code{constants-get}, which has to be autoloaded in your
7671 setup. See the installation instructions in the file
7672 @file{constants.el}.
7673 @item @file{cdlatex.el} by Carsten Dominik
7674 @cindex @file{cdlatex.el}
7675 Org-mode can make use of the cdlatex package to efficiently enter
7676 La@TeX{} fragments into Org-mode files. See @ref{CDLaTeX mode}.
7677 @item @file{imenu.el} by Ake Stenhoff and Lars Lindberg
7678 @cindex @file{imenu.el}
7679 Imenu allows menu access to an index of items in a file. Org-mode
7680 supports imenu - all you need to do to get the index is the following:
7682 (add-hook 'org-mode-hook
7683 (lambda () 'imenu-add-to-menubar "Imenu"))
7685 By default the index is two levels deep - you can modify the depth using
7686 the option @code{org-imenu-depth}.
7687 @item @file{remember.el} by John Wiegley
7688 @cindex @file{remember.el}
7689 Org mode cooperates with remember, see @ref{Remember}.
7690 @file{Remember.el} is not part of Emacs, find it on the web.
7691 @item @file{speedbar.el} by Eric M. Ludlam
7692 @cindex @file{speedbar.el}
7693 Speedbar is a package that creates a special frame displaying files and
7694 index items in files. Org-mode supports speedbar and allows you to
7695 drill into Org-mode files directly from the speedbar. It also allows to
7696 restrict the scope of agenda commands to a file or a subtree by using
7697 the command @kbd{<} in the speedbar frame.
7698 @cindex @file{table.el}
7699 @item @file{table.el} by Takaaki Ota
7701 @cindex table editor, @file{table.el}
7702 @cindex @file{table.el}
7704 Complex ASCII tables with automatic line wrapping, column- and
7705 row-spanning, and alignment can be created using the Emacs table
7706 package by Takaaki Ota (@uref{http://sourceforge.net/projects/table},
7707 and also part of Emacs 22).
7708 When @key{TAB} or @kbd{C-c C-c} is pressed in such a table, Org-mode
7709 will call @command{table-recognize-table} and move the cursor into the
7710 table. Inside a table, the keymap of Org-mode is inactive. In order
7711 to execute Org-mode-related commands, leave the table.
7716 Recognize @file{table.el} table. Works when the cursor is in a
7721 Insert a table.el table. If there is already a table at point, this
7722 command converts it between the table.el format and the Org-mode
7723 format. See the documentation string of the command
7724 @code{org-convert-table} for the restrictions under which this is
7727 @file{table.el} is part of Emacs 22.
7728 @cindex @file{footnote.el}
7729 @item @file{footnote.el} by Steven L. Baur
7730 Org-mode recognizes numerical footnotes as provided by this package
7731 (@pxref{Footnotes}).
7734 @node Conflicts, , Cooperation, Interaction
7735 @subsection Packages that lead to conflicts with Org-mode
7739 @cindex @file{allout.el}
7740 @item @file{allout.el} by Ken Manheimer
7741 Startup of Org-mode may fail with the error message
7742 @code{(wrong-type-argument keymapp nil)} when there is an outdated
7743 version @file{allout.el} on the load path, for example the version
7744 distributed with Emacs 21.x. Upgrade to Emacs 22 and this problem will
7745 disappear. If for some reason you cannot do this, make sure that org.el
7746 is loaded @emph{before} @file{allout.el}, for example by putting
7747 @code{(require 'org)} early enough into your @file{.emacs} file.
7749 @cindex @file{CUA.el}
7750 @item @file{CUA.el} by Kim. F. Storm
7751 Keybindings in Org-mode conflict with the @kbd{S-<cursor>} keys used by
7752 CUA-mode (as well as pc-select-mode and s-region-mode) to select and
7753 extend the region. If you want to use one of these packages along with
7754 Org-mode, configure the variable @code{org-replace-disputed-keys}. When
7755 set, Org-mode will move the following keybindings in Org-mode files, and
7756 in the agenda buffer (but not during date selection).
7759 S-UP -> M-p S-DOWN -> M-n
7760 S-LEFT -> M-- S-RIGHT -> M-+
7763 Yes, these are unfortunately more difficult to remember. If you want
7764 to have other replacement keys, look at the variable
7765 @code{org-disputed-keys}.
7766 @item @file{windmove.el} by Hovav Shacham
7767 @cindex @file{windmove.el}
7768 Also this package uses the @kbd{S-<cursor>} keys, so everything written
7769 in the paragraph above about CUA mode also applies here.
7771 @cindex @file{footnote.el}
7772 @item @file{footnote.el} by Steven L. Baur
7773 Org-mode supports the syntax of the footnote package, but only the
7774 numerical footnote markers. Also, the default key for footnote
7775 commands, @kbd{C-c !} is already used by Org-mode. You could use the
7776 variable @code{footnote-prefix} to switch footnotes commands to another
7777 key. Or, you could use @code{org-replace-disputed-keys} and
7778 @code{org-disputed-keys} to change the settings in Org-mode.
7783 @node Bugs, , Interaction, Miscellaneous
7787 Here is a list of things that should work differently, but which I
7788 have found too hard to fix.
7792 If a table field starts with a link, and if the corresponding table
7793 column is narrowed (@pxref{Narrow columns}) to a width too small to
7794 display the link, the field would look entirely empty even though it is
7795 not. To prevent this, Org-mode throws an error. The work-around is to
7796 make the column wide enough to fit the link, or to add some text (at
7797 least 2 characters) before the link in the same field.
7799 Narrowing table columns does not work on XEmacs, because the
7800 @code{format} function does not transport text properties.
7802 Text in an entry protected with the @samp{QUOTE} keyword should not
7805 When the application called by @kbd{C-c C-o} to open a file link fails
7806 (for example because the application does not exist or refuses to open
7807 the file), it does so silently. No error message is displayed.
7809 Recalculating a table line applies the formulas from left to right.
7810 If a formula uses @emph{calculated} fields further down the row,
7811 multiple recalculation may be needed to get all fields consistent. You
7812 may use the command @code{org-table-iterate} (@kbd{C-u C-c *}) to
7813 recalculate until convergence.
7815 A single letter cannot be made bold, for example @samp{*a*}.
7817 The exporters work well, but could be made more efficient.
7821 @node Extensions and Hacking, History and Acknowledgments, Miscellaneous, Top
7822 @appendix Extensions, Hooks and Hacking
7824 This appendix lists extensions for Org-mode written by other authors.
7825 It also covers some aspects where users can extend the functionality of
7829 * Extensions:: Existing 3rd-part extensions
7830 * Adding hyperlink types:: New custom link types
7831 * Tables in arbitrary syntax:: Orgtbl for LaTeX and other programs
7832 * Dynamic blocks:: Automatically filled blocks
7833 * Special agenda views:: Customized views
7834 * Using the property API:: Writing programs that use entry properties
7837 @node Extensions, Adding hyperlink types, Extensions and Hacking, Extensions and Hacking
7838 @section Third-party extensions for Org-mode
7839 @cindex extension, third-party
7841 The following extensions for Org-mode have been written by other people:
7844 @cindex @file{org-publish.el}
7845 @item @file{org-publish.el} by David O'Toole
7846 This package provides facilities for publishing related sets of Org-mode
7847 files together with linked files like images as webpages. It is
7848 highly configurable and can be used for other publishing purposes as
7849 well. As of Org-mode version 4.30, @file{org-publish.el} is part of the
7850 Org-mode distribution. It is not yet part of Emacs, however, a delay
7851 caused by the preparations for the 22.1 release. In the mean time,
7852 @file{org-publish.el} can be downloaded from David's site:
7853 @url{http://dto.freeshell.org/e/org-publish.el}.
7854 @cindex @file{org-mouse.el}
7855 @item @file{org-mouse.el} by Piotr Zielinski
7856 This package implements extended mouse functionality for Org-mode. It
7857 allows you to cycle visibility and to edit the document structure with
7858 the mouse. Best of all, it provides a context-sensitive menu on
7859 @key{mouse-3} that changes depending on the context of a mouse-click.
7860 As of Org-mode version 4.53, @file{org-mouse.el} is part of the
7861 Org-mode distribution. It is not yet part of Emacs, however, a delay
7862 caused by the preparations for the 22.1 release. In the mean time,
7863 @file{org-mouse.el} can be downloaded from Piotr's site:
7864 @url{http://www.cl.cam.ac.uk/~pz215/files/org-mouse.el}.
7865 @cindex @file{org-blog.el}
7866 @item @file{org-blog.el} by David O'Toole
7867 A blogging plug-in for @file{org-publish.el}.@*
7868 @url{http://dto.freeshell.org/notebook/OrgMode.html}.
7869 @cindex @file{blorg.el}
7870 @item @file{blorg.el} by Bastien Guerry
7871 Publish Org-mode files as
7872 blogs. @url{http://www.cognition.ens.fr/~guerry/blorg.html}.
7873 @cindex @file{org2rem.el}
7874 @item @file{org2rem.el} by Bastien Guerry
7875 Translates Org-mode files into something readable by
7876 Remind. @url{http://www.cognition.ens.fr/~guerry/u/org2rem.el}.
7877 @item @file{org-toc.el} by Bastien Guerry
7878 Produces a simple table of contents of an Org-mode file, for easy
7879 navigation. @url{http://www.cognition.ens.fr/~guerry/u/org-registry.el}.
7880 @item @file{org-registry.el} by Bastien Guerry
7881 Find which Org-file link to a certain document.
7882 @url{http://www.cognition.ens.fr/~guerry/u/org2rem.el}.
7887 @node Adding hyperlink types, Tables in arbitrary syntax, Extensions, Extensions and Hacking
7888 @section Adding hyperlink types
7889 @cindex hyperlinks, adding new types
7891 Org-mode has a large number of hyperlink types built-in
7892 (@pxref{Hyperlinks}). If you would like to add new link types, it
7893 provides an interface for doing so. Lets look at an example file
7894 @file{org-man.el} that will add support for creating links like
7895 @samp{[[man:printf][The printf manpage]]} to show unix manual pages inside
7899 ;;; org-man.el - Support for links to manpages in Org-mode
7903 (org-add-link-type "man" 'org-man-open)
7904 (add-hook 'org-store-link-functions 'org-man-store-link)
7906 (defcustom org-man-command 'man
7907 "The Emacs command to be used to display a man page."
7909 :type '(choice (const man) (const woman)))
7911 (defun org-man-open (path)
7912 "Visit the manpage on PATH.
7913 PATH should be a topic that can be thrown at the man command."
7914 (funcall org-man-command path))
7916 (defun org-man-store-link ()
7917 "Store a link to a manpage."
7918 (when (memq major-mode '(Man-mode woman-mode))
7919 ;; This is a man page, we do make this link
7920 (let* ((page (org-man-get-page-name))
7921 (link (concat "man:" page))
7922 (description (format "Manpage for %s" page)))
7923 (org-store-link-props
7926 :description description))))
7928 (defun org-man-get-page-name ()
7929 "Extract the page name from the buffer name."
7930 ;; This works for both `Man-mode' and `woman-mode'.
7931 (if (string-match " \\(\\S-+\\)\\*" (buffer-name))
7932 (match-string 1 (buffer-name))
7933 (error "Cannot create link to this man page")))
7937 ;;; org-man.el ends here
7941 You would activate this new link type in @file{.emacs} with
7948 Lets go through the file and see what it does.
7951 It does @code{(require 'org)} to make sure that @file{org.el} has been
7954 The next line calls @code{org-add-link-type} to define a new link type
7955 with prefix @samp{man}. The call also contains the name of a function
7956 that will be called to follow such a link.
7958 The next line adds a function to @code{org-store-link-functions}, in
7959 order to allow the command @kbd{C-c l} to record a useful link in a
7960 buffer displaying a man page.
7963 The rest of the file defines the necessary variables and functions.
7964 First there is a customization variable that determines which emacs
7965 command should be used to display manpages. There are two options,
7966 @code{man} and @code{woman}. Then the function to follow a link is
7967 defined. It gets the link path as an argument - in this case the link
7968 path is just a topic for the manual command. The function calls the
7969 value of @code{org-man-command} to display the man page.
7971 Finally the function @code{org-man-store-link} is defined. When you try
7972 to store a link with @kbd{C-c l}, also this function will be called to
7973 try to make a link. The function must first decide if it is supposed to
7974 create the link for this buffer type, we do this by checking the value
7975 of the variable @code{major-mode}. If not, the function must exit and
7976 retunr the value @code{nil}. If yes, the link is created by getting the
7977 manual tpoic from the buffer name and prefixing it with the string
7978 @samp{man:}. Then it must call the command @code{org-store-link-props}
7979 and set the @code{:type} and @code{:link} properties. Optionally you
7980 can also set the @code{:description} property to provide a default for
7981 the link description when the link is later inserted into tan Org-mode
7982 buffer with @kbd{C-c C-l}.
7984 @node Tables in arbitrary syntax, Dynamic blocks, Adding hyperlink types, Extensions and Hacking
7985 @section Tables and Lists in arbitrary syntax
7986 @cindex tables, in other modes
7987 @cindex lists, in other modes
7990 Since Orgtbl-mode can be used as a minor mode in arbitrary buffers, a
7991 frequent feature request has been to make it work with native tables in
7992 specific languages, for example La@TeX{}. However, this is extremely
7993 hard to do in a general way, would lead to a customization nightmare,
7994 and would take away much of the simplicity of the Orgtbl-mode table
7998 This appendix describes a different approach. We keep the Orgtbl-mode
7999 table in its native format (the @i{source table}), and use a custom
8000 function to @i{translate} the table to the correct syntax, and to
8001 @i{install} it in the right location (the @i{target table}). This puts
8002 the burden of writing conversion functions on the user, but it allows
8003 for a very flexible system.
8005 Bastien added the ability to do the same with lists. You can use Org's
8006 facilities to edit and structure lists by turning @code{orgstruct-mode}
8007 on, then locally exporting such lists in another format (HTML, La@TeX{}
8012 * Radio tables:: Sending and receiving
8013 * A LaTeX example:: Step by step, almost a tutorial
8014 * Translator functions:: Copy and modify
8015 * Radio lists:: Doing the same for lists.
8018 @node Radio tables, A LaTeX example, Tables in arbitrary syntax, Tables in arbitrary syntax
8019 @subsection Radio tables
8020 @cindex radio tables
8022 To define the location of the target table, you first need to create two
8023 lines that are comments in the current mode, but contain magic words for
8024 Orgtbl-mode to find. Orgtbl-mode will insert the translated table
8025 between these lines, replacing whatever was there before. For example:
8028 /* BEGIN RECEIVE ORGTBL table_name */
8029 /* END RECEIVE ORGTBL table_name */
8033 Just above the source table, we put a special line that tells
8034 Orgtbl-mode how to translate this table and where to install it. For
8037 #+ORGTBL: SEND table_name translation_function arguments....
8041 @code{table_name} is the reference name for the table that is also used
8042 in the receiver lines. @code{translation_function} is the Lisp function
8043 that does the translation. Furthermore, the line can contain a list of
8044 arguments (alternating key and value) at the end. The arguments will be
8045 passed as a property list to the translation function for
8046 interpretation. A few standard parameters are already recognized and
8047 acted upon before the translation function is called:
8051 Skip the first N lines of the table. Hlines do count!
8052 @item :skipcols (n1 n2 ...)
8053 List of columns that should be skipped. If the table has a column with
8054 calculation marks, that column is automatically discarded as well.
8055 Please note that the translator function sees the table @emph{after} the
8056 removal of these columns, the function never knows that there have been
8061 The one problem remaining is how to keep the source table in the buffer
8062 without disturbing the normal workings of the file, for example during
8063 compilation of a C file or processing of a La@TeX{} file. There are a
8064 number of different solutions:
8068 The table could be placed in a block comment if that is supported by the
8069 language. For example, in C-mode you could wrap the table between
8070 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/} lines.
8072 Sometimes it is possible to put the table after some kind of @i{END}
8073 statement, for example @samp{\bye} in TeX and @samp{\end@{document@}}
8076 You can just comment the table line by line whenever you want to process
8077 the file, and uncomment it whenever you need to edit the table. This
8078 only sounds tedious - the command @kbd{M-x orgtbl-toggle-comment} does
8079 make this comment-toggling very easy, in particular if you bind it to a
8083 @node A LaTeX example, Translator functions, Radio tables, Tables in arbitrary syntax
8084 @subsection A LaTeX example of radio tables
8085 @cindex LaTeX, and orgtbl-mode
8087 The best way to wrap the source table in La@TeX{} is to use the
8088 @code{comment} environment provided by @file{comment.sty}. It has to be
8089 activated by placing @code{\usepackage@{comment@}} into the document
8090 header. Orgtbl-mode can insert a radio table skeleton@footnote{By
8091 default this works only for La@TeX{}, HTML, and TeXInfo. Configure the
8092 variable @code{orgtbl-radio-tables} to install templates for other
8093 modes.} with the command @kbd{M-x orgtbl-insert-radio-table}. You will
8094 be prompted for a table name, lets say we use @samp{salesfigures}. You
8095 will then get the following template:
8098 % BEGIN RECEIVE ORGTBL salesfigures
8099 % END RECEIVE ORGTBL salesfigures
8101 #+ORGTBL: SEND salesfigures orgtbl-to-latex
8107 The @code{#+ORGTBL: SEND} line tells orgtbl-mode to use the function
8108 @code{orgtbl-to-latex} to convert the table into La@TeX{} and to put it
8109 into the receiver location with name @code{salesfigures}. You may now
8110 fill in the table, feel free to use the spreadsheet features@footnote{If
8111 the @samp{#+TBLFM} line contains an odd number of dollar characters,
8112 this may cause problems with font-lock in latex-mode. As shown in the
8113 example you can fix this by adding an extra line inside the
8114 @code{comment} environment that is used to balance the dollar
8115 expressions. If you are using AUCTeX with the font-latex library, a
8116 much better solution is to add the @code{comment} environment to the
8117 variable @code{LaTeX-verbatim-environments}.}:
8120 % BEGIN RECEIVE ORGTBL salesfigures
8121 % END RECEIVE ORGTBL salesfigures
8123 #+ORGTBL: SEND salesfigures orgtbl-to-latex
8124 | Month | Days | Nr sold | per day |
8125 |-------+------+---------+---------|
8126 | Jan | 23 | 55 | 2.4 |
8127 | Feb | 21 | 16 | 0.8 |
8128 | March | 22 | 278 | 12.6 |
8129 #+TBLFM: $4=$3/$2;%.1f
8130 % $ (optional extra dollar to keep font-lock happy, see footnote)
8135 When you are done, press @kbd{C-c C-c} in the table to get the converted
8136 table inserted between the two marker lines.
8138 Now lets assume you want to make the table header by hand, because you
8139 want to control how columns are aligned etc. In this case we make sure
8140 that the table translator does skip the first 2 lines of the source
8141 table, and tell the command to work as a @i{splice}, i.e. to not produce
8142 header and footer commands of the target table:
8145 \begin@{tabular@}@{lrrr@}
8146 Month & \multicolumn@{1@}@{c@}@{Days@} & Nr.\ sold & per day\\
8147 % BEGIN RECEIVE ORGTBL salesfigures
8148 % END RECEIVE ORGTBL salesfigures
8152 #+ORGTBL: SEND salesfigures orgtbl-to-latex :splice t :skip 2
8153 | Month | Days | Nr sold | per day |
8154 |-------+------+---------+---------|
8155 | Jan | 23 | 55 | 2.4 |
8156 | Feb | 21 | 16 | 0.8 |
8157 | March | 22 | 278 | 12.6 |
8158 #+TBLFM: $4=$3/$2;%.1f
8162 The La@TeX{} translator function @code{orgtbl-to-latex} is already part of
8163 Orgtbl-mode. It uses a @code{tabular} environment to typeset the table
8164 and marks horizontal lines with @code{\hline}. Furthermore, it
8165 interprets the following parameters:
8169 When set to t, return only table body lines, don't wrap them into a
8170 tabular environment. Default is nil.
8173 A format to be used to wrap each field, should contain @code{%s} for the
8174 original field value. For example, to wrap each field value in dollars,
8175 you could use @code{:fmt "$%s$"}. This may also be a property list with
8176 column numbers and formats. for example @code{:fmt (2 "$%s$" 4 "%s\\%%")}.
8179 Use this format to print numbers with exponentials. The format should
8180 have @code{%s} twice for inserting mantissa and exponent, for example
8181 @code{"%s\\times10^@{%s@}"}. The default is @code{"%s\\,(%s)"}. This
8182 may also be a property list with column numbers and formats, for example
8183 @code{:efmt (2 "$%s\\times10^@{%s@}$" 4 "$%s\\cdot10^@{%s@}$")}. After
8184 @code{efmt} has been applied to a value, @code{fmt} will also be
8188 @node Translator functions, Radio lists, A LaTeX example, Tables in arbitrary syntax
8189 @subsection Translator functions
8190 @cindex HTML, and orgtbl-mode
8191 @cindex translator function
8193 Orgtbl-mode has several translator functions built-in:
8194 @code{orgtbl-to-latex}, @code{orgtbl-to-html}, and
8195 @code{orgtbl-to-texinfo}. Except for @code{orgtbl-to-html}@footnote{The
8196 HTML translator uses the same code that produces tables during HTML
8197 export.}, these all use a generic translator, @code{orgtbl-to-generic}.
8198 For example, @code{orgtbl-to-latex} itself is a very short function that
8199 computes the column definitions for the @code{tabular} environment,
8200 defines a few field and line separators and then hands over to the
8201 generic translator. Here is the entire code:
8205 (defun orgtbl-to-latex (table params)
8206 "Convert the orgtbl-mode TABLE to LaTeX."
8207 (let* ((alignment (mapconcat (lambda (x) (if x "r" "l"))
8208 org-table-last-alignment ""))
8211 :tstart (concat "\\begin@{tabular@}@{" alignment "@}")
8212 :tend "\\end@{tabular@}"
8213 :lstart "" :lend " \\\\" :sep " & "
8214 :efmt "%s\\,(%s)" :hline "\\hline")))
8215 (orgtbl-to-generic table (org-combine-plists params2 params))))
8219 As you can see, the properties passed into the function (variable
8220 @var{PARAMS}) are combined with the ones newly defined in the function
8221 (variable @var{PARAMS2}). The ones passed into the function (i.e. the
8222 ones set by the @samp{ORGTBL SEND} line) take precedence. So if you
8223 would like to use the La@TeX{} translator, but wanted the line endings to
8224 be @samp{\\[2mm]} instead of the default @samp{\\}, you could just
8225 overrule the default with
8228 #+ORGTBL: SEND test orgtbl-to-latex :lend " \\\\[2mm]"
8231 For a new language, you can either write your own converter function in
8232 analogy with the La@TeX{} translator, or you can use the generic function
8233 directly. For example, if you have a language where a table is started
8234 with @samp{!BTBL!}, ended with @samp{!ETBL!}, and where table lines are
8235 started with @samp{!BL!}, ended with @samp{!EL!} and where the field
8236 separator is a TAB, you could call the generic translator like this (on
8240 #+ORGTBL: SEND test orgtbl-to-generic :tstart "!BTBL!" :tend "!ETBL!"
8241 :lstart "!BL! " :lend " !EL!" :sep "\t"
8245 Please check the documentation string of the function
8246 @code{orgtbl-to-generic} for a full list of parameters understood by
8247 that function and remember that you can pass each of them into
8248 @code{orgtbl-to-latex}, @code{orgtbl-to-texinfo}, and any other function
8249 using the generic function.
8251 Of course you can also write a completely new function doing complicated
8252 things the generic translator cannot do. A translator function takes
8253 two arguments. The first argument is the table, a list of lines, each
8254 line either the symbol @code{hline} or a list of fields. The second
8255 argument is the property list containing all parameters specified in the
8256 @samp{#+ORGTBL: SEND} line. The function must return a single string
8257 containing the formatted table. If you write a generally useful
8258 translator, please post it on @code{emacs-orgmode@@gnu.org} so that
8259 others can benefit from your work.
8261 @node Radio lists, , Translator functions, Tables in arbitrary syntax
8262 @subsection Radio lists
8264 @cindex org-list-insert-radio-list
8266 Sending and receiving radio lists works exactly the same way than
8267 sending and receiving radio tables (@pxref{Radio tables}) @footnote{You
8268 need to load the @code{org-export-latex.el} package to use radio lists
8269 since the relevant code is there for now.}. As for radio tables, you
8270 can insert radio lists templates in HTML, La@TeX{} and TeXInfo modes by
8271 calling @code{org-list-insert-radio-list}.
8273 Here are the differences with radio tables:
8277 Use @code{ORGLST} instead of @code{ORGTBL}.
8279 The available translation functions for radio lists don't take
8282 `C-c C-c' will work when pressed on the first item of the list.
8285 Here is a La@TeX{} example. Let's say that you have this in your
8289 % BEGIN RECEIVE ORGLST to-buy
8290 % END RECEIVE ORGLST to-buy
8292 #+ORGLIST: SEND to-buy orgtbl-to-latex
8301 Pressing `C-c C-c' on @code{a new house} and will insert the converted
8302 La@TeX{} list between the two marker lines.
8304 @node Dynamic blocks, Special agenda views, Tables in arbitrary syntax, Extensions and Hacking
8305 @section Dynamic blocks
8306 @cindex dynamic blocks
8308 Org-mode documents can contain @emph{dynamic blocks}. These are
8309 specially marked regions that are updated by some user-written function.
8310 A good example for such a block is the clock table inserted by the
8311 command @kbd{C-c C-x C-r} (@pxref{Clocking work time}).
8313 Dynamic block are enclosed by a BEGIN-END structure that assigns a name
8314 to the block and can also specify parameters for the function producing
8315 the content of the block.
8318 #+BEGIN: myblock :parameter1 value1 :parameter2 value2 ...
8323 Dynamic blocks are updated with the following commands
8328 Update dynamic block at point.
8329 @kindex C-u C-c C-x C-u
8330 @item C-u C-c C-x C-u
8331 Update all dynamic blocks in the current file.
8334 Updating a dynamic block means to remove all the text between BEGIN and
8335 END, parse the BEGIN line for parameters and then call the specific
8336 writer function for this block to insert the new content. For a block
8337 with name @code{myblock}, the writer function is
8338 @code{org-dblock-write:myblock} with as only parameter a property list
8339 with the parameters given in the begin line. Here is a trivial example
8340 of a block that keeps track of when the block update function was last
8344 #+BEGIN: block-update-time :format "on %m/%d/%Y at %H:%M"
8350 The corresponding block writer function could look like this:
8353 (defun org-dblock-write:block-update-time (params)
8354 (let ((fmt (or (plist-get params :format) "%d. %m. %Y")))
8355 (insert "Last block update at: "
8356 (format-time-string fmt (current-time)))))
8359 If you want to make sure that all dynamic blocks are always up-to-date,
8360 you could add the function @code{org-update-all-dblocks} to a hook, for
8361 example @code{before-save-hook}. @code{org-update-all-dblocks} is
8362 written in a way that is does nothing in buffers that are not in Org-mode.
8364 @node Special agenda views, Using the property API, Dynamic blocks, Extensions and Hacking
8365 @section Special Agenda Views
8366 @cindex agenda views, user-defined
8368 Org-mode provides a special hook that can be used to narrow down the
8369 selection made by any of the agenda views. You may specify a function
8370 that is used at each match to verify if the match should indeed be part
8371 of the agenda view, and if not, how much should be skipped.
8373 Let's say you want to produce a list of projects that contain a WAITING
8374 tag anywhere in the project tree. Let's further assume that you have
8375 marked all tree headings that define a project with the todo keyword
8376 PROJECT. In this case you would run a todo search for the keyword
8377 PROJECT, but skip the match unless there is a WAITING tag anywhere in
8378 the subtree belonging to the project line.
8380 To achieve this, you must write a function that searches the subtree for
8381 the tag. If the tag is found, the function must return @code{nil} to
8382 indicate that this match should not be skipped. If there is no such
8383 tag, return the location of the end of the subtree, to indicate that
8384 search should continue from there.
8387 (defun my-skip-unless-waiting ()
8388 "Skip trees that are not waiting"
8389 (let ((subtree-end (save-excursion (org-end-of-subtree t))))
8390 (if (re-search-forward ":waiting:" subtree-end t)
8391 nil ; tag found, do not skip
8392 subtree-end))) ; tag not found, continue after end of subtree
8395 Now you may use this function in an agenda custom command, for example
8399 (org-add-agenda-custom-command
8400 '("b" todo "PROJECT"
8401 ((org-agenda-skip-function 'my-org-waiting-projects)
8402 (org-agenda-overriding-header "Projects waiting for something: "))))
8405 Note that this also binds @code{org-agenda-overriding-header} to get a
8406 meaningful header in the agenda view.
8408 You may also put a Lisp form into @code{org-agenda-skip-function}. In
8409 particular, you may use the functions @code{org-agenda-skip-entry-if}
8410 and @code{org-agenda-skip-subtree-if} in this form, for example:
8413 @item '(org-agenda-skip-entry-if 'scheduled)
8414 Skip current entry if it has been scheduled.
8415 @item '(org-agenda-skip-entry-if 'notscheduled)
8416 Skip current entry if it has not been scheduled.
8417 @item '(org-agenda-skip-entry-if 'deadline)
8418 Skip current entry if it has a deadline.
8419 @item '(org-agenda-skip-entry-if 'scheduled 'deadline)
8420 Skip current entry if it has a deadline, or if it is scheduled.
8421 @item '(org-agenda-skip-entry 'regexp "regular expression")
8422 Skip current entry if the regular expression matches in the entry.
8423 @item '(org-agenda-skip-entry 'notregexp "regular expression")
8424 Skip current entry unless the regular expression matches.
8425 @item '(org-agenda-skip-subtree-if 'regexp "regular expression")
8426 Same as above, but check and skip the entire subtree.
8429 Therefore we could also have written the search for WAITING projects
8430 like this, even without defining a special function:
8433 (org-add-agenda-custom-command
8434 '("b" todo "PROJECT"
8435 ((org-agenda-skip-function '(org-agenda-skip-subtree-if
8436 'regexp ":waiting:"))
8437 (org-agenda-overriding-header "Projects waiting for something: "))))
8441 @node Using the property API, , Special agenda views, Extensions and Hacking
8442 @section Using the property API
8443 @cindex API, for properties
8444 @cindex properties, API
8446 Here is a description of the functions that can be used to work with
8449 @defun org-entry-properties &optional pom which
8450 Get all properties of the entry at point-or-marker POM.
8451 This includes the TODO keyword, the tags, time strings for deadline,
8452 scheduled, and clocking, and any additional properties defined in the
8453 entry. The return value is an alist, keys may occur multiple times
8454 if the property key was used several times.
8455 POM may also be nil, in which case the current entry is used.
8456 If WHICH is nil or `all', get all properties. If WHICH is
8457 `special' or `standard', only get that subclass.
8459 @defun org-entry-get pom property &optional inherit
8460 Get value of PROPERTY for entry at point-or-marker POM.
8461 If INHERIT is non-nil and the entry does not have the property,
8462 then also check higher levels of the hierarchy. This function ignores
8463 the value of @code{org-use-property-inheritance} and requires the
8464 explicit INHERIT flag.
8467 @defun org-entry-delete pom property
8468 Delete the property PROPERTY from entry at point-or-marker POM.
8471 @defun org-entry-put pom property value
8472 Set PROPERTY to VALUE for entry at point-or-marker POM.
8475 @defun org-buffer-property-keys &optional include-specials
8476 Get all property keys in the current buffer.
8479 @defun org-insert-property-drawer
8480 Insert a property drawer at point.
8483 @node History and Acknowledgments, Main Index, Extensions and Hacking, Top
8484 @appendix History and Acknowledgments
8485 @cindex acknowledgments
8489 Org-mode was borne in 2003, out of frustration over the user interface
8490 of the Emacs outline-mode. I was trying to organize my notes and
8491 projects, and using Emacs seemed to be the natural way to go. However,
8492 having to remember eleven different commands with two or three keys per
8493 command, only to hide and unhide parts of the outline tree, that seemed
8494 entirely unacceptable to me. Also, when using outlines to take notes, I
8495 constantly want to restructure the tree, organizing it parallel to my
8496 thoughts and plans. @emph{Visibility cycling} and @emph{structure
8497 editing} were originally implemented in the package
8498 @file{outline-magic.el}, but quickly moved to the more general
8499 @file{org.el}. As this environment became comfortable for project
8500 planning, the next step was adding @emph{TODO entries}, basic @emph{time
8501 stamps}, and @emph{table support}. These areas highlight the two main
8502 goals that Org-mode still has today: To create a new, outline-based,
8503 plain text mode with innovative and intuitive editing features, and to
8504 incorporate project planning functionality directly into a notes file.
8506 Since the first release, literally thousands of emails to me or on
8507 @code{emacs-orgmode@@gnu.org} have provided a constant stream of bug
8508 reports, feedback, new ideas, and sometimes patches and add-on code.
8509 Many thanks to everyone who has helped to improve this package. I am
8510 trying to keep here a list of the people who had significant influence
8511 in shaping one or more aspects of Org-mode. The list may not be
8512 complete, if I have forgotten someone, please accept my apologies and
8518 @i{Russel Adams} came up with the idea for drawers.
8520 @i{Thomas Baumann} contributed the code for links to the MH-E email
8523 @i{Alex Bochannek} provided a patch for rounding time stamps.
8525 @i{Charles Cave}'s suggestion sparked the implementation of templates
8528 @i{Pavel Chalmoviansky} influenced the agenda treatment of items with
8531 @i{Gregory Chernov} patched support for lisp forms into table
8532 calculations and improved XEmacs compatibility, in particular by porting
8533 @file{nouline.el} to XEmacs.
8535 @i{Sacha Chua} suggested to copy some linking code from Planner.
8537 @i{Eddward DeVilla} proposed and tested checkbox statistics. He also
8538 came up with the idea of properties, and that there should be an API for
8541 @i{Kees Dullemond} used to edit projects lists directly in HTML and so
8542 inspired some of the early development, including HTML export. He also
8543 asked for a way to narrow wide table columns.
8545 @i{Christian Egli} converted the documentation into TeXInfo format,
8546 patched CSS formatting into the HTML exporter, and inspired the agenda.
8548 @i{David Emery} provided a patch for custom CSS support in exported
8551 @i{Nic Ferrier} contributed mailcap and XOXO support.
8553 @i{Miguel A. Figueroa-Villanueva} implemented hierarchical checkboxes.
8555 @i{John Foerch} figured out how to make incremental search show context
8556 around a match in a hidden outline tree.
8558 @i{Niels Giesen} had the idea to automatically archive DONE trees.
8560 @i{Bastien Guerry} wrote the La@TeX{} exporter and has been prolific
8561 with patches, ideas, and bug reports.
8563 @i{Kai Grossjohann} pointed out key-binding conflicts with other packages.
8565 @i{Scott Jaderholm} proposed footnotes, control over whitespace between
8566 folded entries, and column view for properties.
8568 @i{Shidai Liu} ("Leo") asked for embedded La@TeX{} and tested it. He also
8569 provided frequent feedback and some patches.
8571 @i{Jason F. McBrayer} suggested agenda export to CSV format.
8573 @i{Max Mikhanosha} came up with the idea of refiling.
8575 @i{Dmitri Minaev} sent a patch to set priority limits on a per-file
8578 @i{Stefan Monnier} provided a patch to keep the Emacs-Lisp compiler
8581 @i{Rick Moynihan} proposed to allow multiple TODO sequences in a file
8582 and to be able to quickly restrict the agenda to a subtree.
8584 @i{Todd Neal} provided patches for links to Info files and elisp forms.
8586 @i{Tim O'Callaghan} suggested in-file links, search options for general
8587 file links, and TAGS.
8589 @i{Takeshi Okano} translated the manual and David O'Toole's tutorial
8592 @i{Oliver Oppitz} suggested multi-state TODO items.
8594 @i{Scott Otterson} sparked the introduction of descriptive text for
8595 links, among other things.
8597 @i{Pete Phillips} helped during the development of the TAGS feature, and
8598 provided frequent feedback.
8600 @i{T.V. Raman} reported bugs and suggested improvements.
8602 @i{Matthias Rempe} (Oelde) provided ideas, Windows support, and quality
8605 @i{Kevin Rogers} contributed code to access VM files on remote hosts.
8607 @i{Frank Ruell} solved the mystery of the @code{keymapp nil} bug, a
8608 conflict with @file{allout.el}.
8610 @i{Jason Riedy} sent a patch to fix a bug with export of TODO keywords.
8612 @i{Philip Rooke} created the Org-mode reference card and provided lots
8615 @i{Christian Schlauer} proposed angular brackets around links, among
8618 Linking to VM/BBDB/GNUS was inspired by @i{Tom Shannon}'s
8619 @file{organizer-mode.el}.
8621 @i{Daniel Sinder} came up with the idea of internal archiving by locking
8624 @i{Dale Smith} proposed link abbreviations.
8626 @i{Adam Spiers} asked for global linking commands and inspired the link
8627 extension system. support mairix.
8629 @i{David O'Toole} wrote @file{org-publish.el} and drafted the manual
8630 chapter about publishing.
8632 @i{J@"urgen Vollmer} contributed code generating the table of contents
8635 @i{Chris Wallace} provided a patch implementing the @samp{QUOTE}
8638 @i{David Wainberg} suggested archiving, and improvements to the linking
8641 @i{John Wiegley} wrote @file{emacs-wiki.el} and @file{planner.el}. The
8642 development of Org-mode was fully independent, and both systems are
8643 really different beasts in their basic ideas and implementation details.
8644 I later looked at John's code, however, and learned from his
8645 implementation of (i) links where the link itself is hidden and only a
8646 description is shown, and (ii) popping up a calendar to select a date.
8647 John has also contributed a number of great ideas directly to Org-mode.
8649 @i{Carsten Wimmer} suggested some changes and helped fix a bug in
8652 @i{Roland Winkler} requested additional keybindings to make Org-mode
8655 @i{Piotr Zielinski} wrote @file{org-mouse.el}, proposed agenda blocks
8656 and contributed various ideas and code snippets.
8660 @node Main Index, Key Index, History and Acknowledgments, Top
8661 @unnumbered The Main Index
8665 @node Key Index, , Main Index, Top
8666 @unnumbered Key Index
8673 arch-tag: 7893d1fe-cc57-4d13-b5e5-f494a1bcc7ac